Fostex Musical Instrument MR 8HD User Manual

8588 082 000  
(447055)  
Owner’s Manual  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A / IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
4
1
2
3
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
Caution: Please visit Fostex website (http://  
www.fostex.com) for the latest version software.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Safety instructions/Contents)  
Important Safety Instructions  
1)  
2)  
3)  
4)  
5)  
6)  
7)  
Read these instructions.  
Keep these instructions.  
Heed all warnings.  
11) Only use attachments/accessories  
specified by the manufacturer.  
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,  
bracket, or table specified by the  
manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.  
When a cart is used, use caution when  
moving the cart/apparatus combination  
to avoid injury from tip-over.  
Follow all instructions.  
Do not use this apparatus near water.  
Clean only with dry cloth.  
Do not block any ventilation openings.  
Install in accordance with the  
manufacturer's instructions.  
8)  
9)  
Do not install near any heat sources such  
as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or  
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that  
produce heat.  
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning  
storms or when unused for long periods  
of time.  
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service  
personnel. Servicing is required when the  
apparatus has been damaged in any  
way, such as power-supply cord or plug  
is damaged, liquid has been spilled or  
objects have fallen into the apparatus, the  
apparatus has been exposed to rain or  
moisture, does not operate normally, or  
has been dropped.  
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the  
polarized or grounding-type plug.  
A polarized plug has two blades with one  
wider than the other. A grounding type  
plug has two blades and a third grounding  
prong. The wide blade or the third prong  
are provided for your safety.  
If the provided plug does not fit into your  
outlet, consult an electrician for  
replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
10) Protect the power cord from being walked  
on or pinched particularly at plugs,  
convenience receptacles, and the point  
where they exit from the apparatus.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Safety instructions/Contents)  
Table of contents  
Safety Instructions .................................................................................................................2  
Read this chapter first! .............................................................................................................9  
Introduction ..........................................................................................................................10  
MR-8HD/CD main features ..................................................................................................10  
Precautions before using ...................................................................................................11  
About power supply ...................................................................................................11  
Precautions upon installing the MR-8HD/CD ........................................................11  
Notes on repair ...........................................................................................................11  
About copyrights ........................................................................................................11  
About damages ...........................................................................................................11  
Note on audio interruption .......................................................................................11  
Notes on USB connection with Mac OS ....................................................................11  
The basics of the MR-8HD/CD ............................................................................................12  
Recording method ......................................................................................................12  
About song ...................................................................................................................13  
Remain (recordable space left on the disk) ............................................................13  
Time base .....................................................................................................................14  
Input and repro monitor ...........................................................................................14  
TRIM control ................................................................................................................15  
Names and functions .............................................................................................................17  
Top panel 1 ............................................................................................................................18  
Top panel 2 ............................................................................................................................20  
Rear panel .............................................................................................................................22  
Side panel .............................................................................................................................23  
LCD display ..........................................................................................................................24  
Home screen ................................................................................................................24  
Selecting a time base mode ......................................................................................25  
Adjusting the display contrast .................................................................................25  
MENU mode screen ....................................................................................................26  
Warning message .......................................................................................................26  
Basic operations .....................................................................................................................27  
About power .........................................................................................................................28  
Power connection .......................................................................................................28  
About the standby mode ......................................................................28  
Turning on the unit ....................................................................................................28  
Listening the demo song ....................................................................................................29  
Connecting headphones (or monitor speaker system) ........................................29  
Playing back the demo song .....................................................................................30  
Creating a song for recording ..........................................................................................31  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Safety instructions/Contents)  
Input connection ..................................................................................................................33  
Input channel ..............................................................................................................33  
INPUT A SEL switch .....................................................................................................33  
Recording track combinations and available input channel(s) ..........................34  
Recording onto a single track ............................................................................................35  
Preparation for recording .........................................................................................35  
Starting recording ......................................................................................................36  
Playing back the recorded track ...............................................................................36  
Undoing recording (undo/redo) .............................................................................36  
Overdubbing basics ............................................................................................................37  
Preparation for recording .........................................................................................37  
Adjusting the recording levels while listening to track 1 .....................................38  
Starting recording ......................................................................................................38  
Playing back recorded track .....................................................................................38  
Undoing recording (undo/redo) .............................................................................38  
Recording onto four tracks simultaneously ....................................................................39  
Preparation for recording .........................................................................................39  
Starting recording ......................................................................................................40  
Playing back recorded tracks ....................................................................................40  
Undoing recording (undo/redo) .............................................................................40  
Basic mixdown .....................................................................................................................41  
Mixdown to an analog recorder ...............................................................................41  
Mixdown to a digital recorder ..................................................................................42  
Advanced playback and locates functions .........................................................................43  
3 x cueing ..............................................................................................................................44  
Playback between LOCATE A and B points .....................................................................44  
Play mode ..............................................................................................................................45  
Selecting a play mode ................................................................................................45  
Auto play mode ...........................................................................................................46  
Auto return mode .......................................................................................................46  
Loop mode ...................................................................................................................46  
Loop function in auto punch in/out mode ........................................47  
Locate function ....................................................................................................................48  
Time locate ..................................................................................................................48  
Locating to the beginning (ABS ZERO) of a song ...............................48  
Locating to the recording end point (REC END) of a song ...............48  
Locating to the LOCATE A or LOCATE B point ........................................................49  
Setting the LOCATE A or LOCATE B point ..........................................49  
Locating ...................................................................................................50  
Punch in/out .............................................................................................................................51  
Punch in/out using the keys on the top panel ..................................................................52  
Punch in/out using the footswitch .....................................................................................53  
Auto punch in/out .................................................................................................................54  
Setting the punch-in and punch-out points ...........................................................54  
Rehearsal for auto punch in/out ..............................................................................55  
Actual auto punch in/out ..........................................................................................56  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Safety instructions/Contents)  
Using effects ............................................................................................................................57  
Using the insert effects .......................................................................................................58  
Mic simulation effects ................................................................................................58  
Amp simulation effects ..............................................................................................58  
Applying external effects ....................................................................................................59  
Using the reverb or delay ....................................................................................................60  
Selecting an effect type ..............................................................................................60  
Selecting a delay type ................................................................................................60  
Adjusting the delay/reverb time .............................................................................61  
Adjusting the effect send levels ................................................................................61  
Using the mastering effects ...............................................................................................62  
Selecting the desired effect type ..............................................................................62  
Track bouncing .......................................................................................................................63  
Preliminary knowledge .......................................................................................................64  
Track bouncing example ...........................................................................................64  
Signal flow of track bouncing ...................................................................................65  
Bouncing tracks 1 through 4 to tracks 5/6 ........................................................................66  
Rehearsal of track bouncing .....................................................................................66  
Actual track bouncing ...............................................................................................67  
Checking the bounced signals on tracks 5/6 .........................................................67  
Bouncing tracks 1 through 6 to tracks 7/8 ........................................................................68  
Rehearsal of track bouncing .....................................................................................68  
Actual track bouncing ...............................................................................................69  
Checking the bounced signals on tracks 7/8 .........................................................69  
Bouncing tracks 1 through 8 to a new song .....................................................................70  
Rehearsal of track bouncing .....................................................................................70  
Actual track bouncing ...............................................................................................71  
Mixing signals of inputs A through D ................................................................................72  
Connecting sound sources to INPUT A through INPUT D ....................................72  
[TO STEREO BUSS ON/OFF] key setting ...................................................................72  
Panning setting for INPUT A through INPUT D ......................................................73  
Bouncing the desired part of a song .................................................................................74  
Rhythm guide function ..........................................................................................................75  
Using the rhythm guide function .......................................................................................76  
Setting the time signature and tempo .....................................................................76  
Creating the conductor map ..............................................................................................78  
Setting the signature map .........................................................................................78  
Editing a time signature event .............................................................80  
Deleting an unnecessary time signature event .................................80  
Editing the bar offset ..................................................................................................81  
Setting the tempo map ...............................................................................................82  
Editing a tempo event ...........................................................................84  
Deleting an unnecessary tempo event ...............................................84  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Safety instructions/Contents)  
MIDI synchronization .............................................................................................................85  
Synchronization using MTC ...............................................................................................86  
Connection ..................................................................................................................86  
Settings of the MR-8HD/CD and MIDI sequencer ..................................................86  
MIDI sync/MTC frame rate settings .........................................................................86  
Synchronization using MIDI clock .....................................................................................87  
Connection ..................................................................................................................87  
Settings of the MR-8HD/CD and MIDI sequencer ..................................................87  
Data export to a personal computer .....................................................................................89  
WAV file conversion .............................................................................................................90  
Enabling the file conversion .....................................................................................90  
Procedure of file conversion .....................................................................................90  
Exporting data to a personal computer ............................................................................92  
Connection to a personal computer ........................................................................92  
Notes on exporting a file ............................................................................................92  
Exporting a WAV file to a personal computer ........................................................93  
Protecting the hard disk ......................................................................................................94  
Archiving a song ..................................................................................................................95  
Song management .................................................................................................................97  
Selecting the desired song .................................................................................................98  
Editing a song name ............................................................................................................99  
Deleting an unnecessary song ......................................................................................100  
Protecting a song .............................................................................................................101  
Track editing ..........................................................................................................................103  
Erasing track data ..............................................................................................................104  
Copying/pasting track data ..............................................................................................105  
Moving track data ...............................................................................................................107  
Exchanging whole track data ...........................................................................................108  
Part editing .............................................................................................................................111  
Playing back the “part” (Between LOCATE A and LOCATE B) to be edited .............112  
Changing an edit point during editing .................................................................112  
Editing the part(s) ..............................................................................................................113  
Copying/pasting the part(s)-1 ..........................................................................................114  
Copying/pasting the part(s)-2 ..........................................................................................116  
Copying to the clipboard ........................................................................................116  
Pasting clipboard data .............................................................................................117  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Safety instructions/Contents)  
Moving the part(s) .............................................................................................................119  
Exchange the parts ............................................................................................................120  
Other functions .....................................................................................................................123  
Hard disk formatting ..........................................................................................................124  
Peak hold time setting .......................................................................................................125  
Pre-roll/post-roll time setting ...........................................................................................126  
Beat resolution mode on/off .............................................................................................127  
Phantom power on/off .......................................................................................................128  
Initializing the MR-8HD/CD ...............................................................................................130  
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................131  
Trouble for recording .........................................................................................................132  
Trouble for playback ..........................................................................................................133  
Trouble for effect ................................................................................................................134  
Trouble for USB connection .............................................................................................134  
Other troubles .....................................................................................................................135  
MR-8HD/CD Specifications ........................................................................................................137  
Specifications .....................................................................................................................138  
Physical dimensions .........................................................................................................139  
Block diagram ....................................................................................................................140  
MIDI implementation chart ...............................................................................................142  
Index ....................................................................................................................................143  
Declaration of EC Directive ..............................................................................................144  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Read this chapter first!)  
Read this chapter first!  
This chapter describes precautions before using, as well as features and  
basic knowledge of the MR-8HD/CD.  
To understand the MR-8HD/CD features and basic functions, read this  
chapter before using.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Read this chapter first!)  
Introduction  
Thank you very much for purchasing the Fostex MR-8HD/CD digital multitracker.  
The MR-8HD/CD is a digital multitracker which can record 8-track audio at 44.1 kHz/16 bits on the  
internal 3.5-inch hard disk. Up to four tracks can be recorded simultaneously.  
The MR-8HD/CD is also equipped with an 8-channel digital mixer, digital effects including the delay/  
reverb, mastering effects and insert effects (simulation effects). It allows you to carry out all the  
process for digital multitrack recording including overdubbing, track bouncing and mixdown within  
the digital domain, ensuring no loss of sound quality.  
You can also create an original audio CD using the internal CD-R/RW drive (or an external CD-R/RW  
drive connected to the [USB HOST] port).  
MR-8HD/CD main features  
You can export the converted stereo WAV file  
to a personal computer and create an audio CD  
using the CD burn function of the personal  
computer.  
• You can record high quality audio to the built-  
in high performance 3.5-inch hard disk drive  
(40GB). You can also edit recorded audio later  
without sound deterioration. Up to 99 songs  
can be recorded.  
• The [DIGITAL OUT] port outputs S/PDIF  
format digital signals. You can make mixdown  
or digital copy to an external DAT or MD  
recorder.  
• Provides four analog input channels and up to  
four tracks can be recorded simultaneously.  
Signals of four input channels ([INPUT A]  
through [INPUT D]) can be mixed to the stereo  
buss (Pre mastering effects).  
• The whole or a part of track data can be edited  
(i.e. copied, pasted, moved, exported,  
exchanged and erased).  
• You can bounce all eight tracks to a new song,  
which is automatically created in the bouncing  
process.  
• The [MIDI OUT] port is provided.  
You can synchronize the MR-8HD/CD with  
external MIDI devices (MIDI sequencer, etc.)  
using MTC or MIDI clock.  
• An ASP digital effect processor (delay/reverb)  
with the algorithm newly developed by Fostex  
is built in, allowing effect processing to tracks 1  
through 4 during track bouncing.  
• The CD-R/RW drive is built in as standard.  
You can create an audio CD (CD-DA), as well as  
can export (copy) the mono WAV file converted  
from unit's song data to a CD-R/RW disc.  
See the supplementary manual “How to use the  
CD-R/RW drive” for details.  
In addition, the MR-8HD/CD also provides  
insert effects for microphone and amplifier  
simulation for coloring sounds.  
• The dedicated mastering effects are built in for  
the stereo buss, allowing you to process sounds  
during track bouncing or final mixdown.  
• The [USB HOST] port is provided for  
connecting to an external CD-R/RW drive.  
You can burn an audio CD in the CD-DA  
format using an external CD-R/RW drive.  
See the supplementary manual “How to use the  
CD-R/RW drive” for details.  
• The adoption of self-illuminated keys allows  
intuitive operation.  
• Phantom power is built in, allowing direct  
connection of condenser microphones.  
• The 2-mix file playback mode allows you to play  
back a stereo WAV file which is used for  
creating an audio CD, as well as set CUE points  
for dividing file data into individual CD tracks  
on the audio CD.  
• The rhythm guide function is provided.  
You can make global time signature/tempo  
setting for a simple song or create a conductor  
map for a more complicate song, and output  
the guide click.  
See the supplementary manual “How to use the  
CD-R/RW drive” for details.  
• Song data (on mono WAV files on tracks 7 and  
8) mastered by the MR-8HD/CD can be  
converted to a stereo WAV file easily.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Read this chapter first!)  
Precautions before using  
About power supply  
Notes on repair  
• Be sure to connect the MR-8HD/CD to the  
power supply specified in the specifications  
section of this owner's manual. Do not use  
an AC outlet of any other voltage.  
• The MR-8HD/CD does not use any parts that  
user can repair easily. Contact your dealer  
or the nearest Fostex service station to ask  
about repairs.  
• Do not connect the MR-8HD/CD to the same  
AC outlet to which devices that could  
generate noise (such as a large motor or  
dimmer), or the devices that consume a large  
amount of power (such as an air  
• Use the original packing carton of the  
MR-8HD/CD when you transport or send the  
MR-8HD/CD to the dealer or Fostex service  
station for repair.  
If you have discarded the packing carton,  
pack the MR-8HD/CD using shock absorbing  
materials. Fostex is not responsible for  
malfunction or damage due to incomplete  
packaging or caused during transportation.  
conditioning system or large electric heater)  
are connected.  
• If you use the MR-8HD/CD in an area with a  
different power voltage, first consult your  
dealer or the nearest Fostex service station.  
• Because the MR-8HD/CD is a consumer  
product, Fostex does not offer on-site service  
or provide a loaner unit while your MR-8HD/  
CD is under repair.  
• The [POWER] switch cannot turn off the  
power completely. When this switch is "up",  
the MR-8HD/CD enters standby mode (i.e. the  
power does not completely turned off).  
Therefore, if you do not use the MR-8HD/CD  
for a long time, we recommend unplugging  
the power cord from the AC outlet.  
About copyrights  
• It is prohibited by law to use any part of a CD  
recording or video images or audio data for  
which copyright is possessed by a third party  
for commercial purposes such as contents,  
broadcasts, sales, or distribution-any purpose  
other than for your personal pleasure.  
• It is very dangerous to use a power cord that  
is frayed or damage. In such a case, stop  
using the MR-8HD/CD immediately and ask  
your dealer to repair the cord.  
<Important! >  
About damages  
Model name, power requirement, serial  
number and other information for the  
MR-8HD/CD are shown at the bottom of  
the unit.  
• Fostex is not responsible for any "direct  
damage" or "indirect damage" caused by using  
the MR-8HD/CD.  
MODEL MR-8HD/CD  
DIGITAL MULTITRACKER  
P
E
S
FOSTEX  
100-240V ~  
50/60Hz  
16W  
Notes on audio interruption  
SERIAL NO.  
MADE IN CHINA  
• If you make recording or editing to a song  
many times, audio may be occasionally  
interrupted when the song is played back,  
due to data fragmentation. Note that this is  
not a malfunction.  
Precautions upon installing the MR-8HD/CD  
• Do not install the MR-8HD/CD in locations  
subject to the following:  
Note on USB connection with Mac OS  
* Extremely high or low temperature, or  
significant changes in temperature.  
* Excessive humidity or dust.  
* Excessive changes in power supply  
voltage.  
* Unstable or significantly vibrating or  
shaking surfaces.  
* Near a strong magnetic field (such as a  
TV or speaker).  
• Before you connect the MR-8HD/CD to a  
Macintosh computer, make sure that the OS  
is Mac OS X or higher. The MR-8HD/CD  
supports only Mac OS X or higher.  
If you connect the MR-8HD/CD to a Macintosh  
computer with Mac OS lower than "OS X",  
song data on the MR-8HD/CD may be  
damaged.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Read this chapter first!)  
The basics of the MR-8HD/CD  
This section describes the basics of the MR-8HD/CD you should know before using the MR-  
8HD/CD.  
Recording method  
The MR-8HD/CD is fitted with a 3.5-inch hard disk drive. Songs are recorded on a hard disk  
along with the ABS time (from 00m 00s 000ms to 399m 59s 999ms).  
INPUT  
A
SELECT  
INPUT  
BAL  
A
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
TRIM  
MIN  
MAX LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
POWER  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT  
AMP SIMULATION  
CONTRAST  
/
A
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
POWERFUL  
NATURAL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
PAN  
3.5-inch hard disk drive  
LOCATE  
L
R
L
L
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A
/
IN  
B
/
OUT  
STORE  
+-_0  
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
The ABS time shows the absolute time on a hard disk and you can start recording from any  
desired time within the range between 00m 00s 000ms and 399m 59s 999ms ABS time.  
The beginning of a song  
0m00s000ms  
15m00s000ms  
(REC END)  
399m59s999ms  
......  
Non-recorded area  
(ABS ZERO)  
05m00s000ms 10m00s000ms  
Recorded area Non-recorded area Recorded area  
You can start recording from any desired time within the range  
between 00m00s000ms and 399m59s999ms ABS time.  
As the MR-8HD/CD does not consume the disk space when no audio is recorded, you can record  
audio effectively, while the recordable time for a tape recorder depends on the tape length.  
Non recorded area (shown in white)  
399m59s999ms  
......  
0m00s000ms  
5-minute recording 5-minute recording  
Non-recorded area (remain)  
Recorded area (shown in gray)  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Read this chapter first!)  
About song  
To understand songs, imagine separated rooms as shown below. Each room can be regarded as  
a song. With the MR-8HD/CD, you can create up to 99 rooms (songs) on the hard disk (although  
the available space may limit the number of songs).  
Song01  
Song02  
Song03  
Song04  
Song05  
Recorded track data is stored in a song as mono WAV  
files, as shown below.  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 8  
Song98  
Song99  
Song01  
WAV files  
Each song is independent on a disk and you can record, play back or edit a song without affect-  
ing other songs. You can give a desired song name for managing recorded songs (see page 99).  
Recorded track data is stored in a song as mono WAV files.  
The MR-8HD/CD can convert the two WAV files recorded on tracks 7 and 8 (L and R) to a stereo  
WAV file (see page 90).  
You can burn converted stereo WAV files to an audio CD by using the internal CD-R/RW drive or  
a drive connected to the [USB HOST] port (see the supplementary manual "Using the CD-R/RW  
drive"). You can also burn converted stereo WAV files to an audio CD by exporting them to a  
personal computer and using the music software application on the personal computer (see  
page 92).  
Remain (recordable space left on the disk)  
"Remain" shows how much time you can further record audio data to the available space left on  
the internal hard disk.  
As described earlier, the MR-8HD/CD stripes ABS time from 0m 00s 000ms to 399m 59s 999ms  
at maximum for each song. However, the remaining time (= available recording time left) de-  
pends on the available space on the hard disk in actual use. The remaining time is shown as in  
the screen example below during recording or record standby. Note that it shows the remaining  
time for recording onto a mono track.  
Remain value  
A "mono" track means a single track. Therefore, you can calculate the remaining time for record-  
ing to more than one track by dividing the displayed time by the number of tracks. Note that the  
remaining time shown on the screen is an approximate time.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Read this chapter first!)  
Time base  
The term, "time base", is used as the reference of recorder position information.  
Using the [TIME BASE SELECT] key, you can select from among two time base modes: ABS time  
and bar/beat mode. Each screen example below shows the recorder is located at the beginning of  
a song in each time base mode.  
<Bar/beat mode>  
<ABS time mode>  
ABS time mode:  
ABS time stands for Absolute time, which is "striped" on the disk when creating a song. It starts from  
0m 00s 000ms (=ABS zero, the beginning of a song) and ends by 399m 59s 999ms at maximum.  
Bar/beat mode:  
The bar/beat/clock information is created according to the internal tempo map.  
The ABS zero position is set to "bar -2/beat 1/clk 000" by default (this is called "bar offset").  
The MR-8HD/CD determines the bar/beat/clock value in a song in referenced to the bar offset,  
as well as the time signature map and tempo map. You can set the bar offset between bar 1 to bar  
-8 via the menu mode (see page 81). The figure below shows the relation between two time base  
modes.  
The beginning of a song  
0m00s000ms  
0m03s000ms  
0m06s000ms  
(ABS ZERO)  
ABS time mode  
3bar 1 000clk  
-2bar 1 000clk  
1bar 1 000clk  
Bar/beat mode  
Input monitor and repro monitor  
Each of the MR-8HD/CD tracks has two output modes: repro monitor and input monitor.  
In the repro monitor mode, the track playback signal is output. So if you want to listen to the  
track playback sound, select the repro monitor mode.  
In the input monitor mode, the input signal fed to the track is output. So you can check the level  
of the input signal to be recorded.  
To enter a MR-8HD/CD track to input monitor mode, press the appropriate [REC SELECT] key to  
arm the track (i.e. make the track record-ready), then press only the [RECORD] key to enter the  
"RECORD READY" mode or press both the [RECORD] and [PLAY] keys simultaneously to start  
recording.  
Input signals for  
recorder tracks  
Output signals from  
recorder tracks  
Playback signal (repro monitor)  
Playback signal (repro monitor)  
Input signal (input monitor)  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
READY  
Input signal (input monitor)  
READY  
Playback signal (repro monitor)  
Playback signal (repro monitor)  
Playback signal (repro monitor)  
Playback signal (repro monitor)  
Track 6  
Track 7  
Track 8  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Read this chapter first!)  
[TRIM] control  
You must pay great attention to the [TRIM] control adjustment when recording to the MR-8HD/  
CD.  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT B  
BAL  
INPUT C  
BAL  
INPUT D  
BAL  
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
DISTORTION  
[TRIM] control  
MIN  
MAX LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
MIC  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PEAK  
PEAK  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
PEAK LED  
The analog signal received at each input ([INPUT A] through [INPUT D]) is sent to the [TRIM]  
control, by which the signal level fed to the A/D converter of the MR-8HD/CD is controlled.  
You can check this level by the PEAK indicator. If the level is too high, the PEAK indicator lights,  
while you may hear the sound distorted or noisy. This distortion (noise) generated at this stage  
cannot be eliminated, therefore, adjust the TRIM control properly so that the PEAK indicator  
does not light at the loudest part of the input signal.  
The level is too high.  
Proper level  
Clipping level  
Clipping level  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Read this chapter first!)  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Names and functions)  
Names and functions  
This chapter describes the names and functions of the controls, keys,  
connectors, etc. on the MR-8HD/CD top panel, side panel and rear panel,  
as well as details of the display. See this chapter whenever you want to  
know the function of a control, key, etc.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Names and functions)  
Top panel 1  
1
2
4
3
5
8
6
7
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT B  
BAL  
INPUT C  
BAL  
INPUT D  
BAL  
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
21  
20  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
TRIM  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
19  
18  
17  
16  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
9
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
10  
11  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
15  
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A / IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
14  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
13  
12  
1.  
[INPUT A] input connectors  
(XLR connector and phone jack)  
3.  
[INPUT B] input connectors  
(XLR connector and phone jack)  
You can connect a microphone, keyboard,  
etc. to the [INPUT B] input.  
Both the [BAL] XLR connector and [UNBAL]  
phone jack are provided so you can use the  
appropriate connector according to the  
sound source.  
If you connect sources to both the XLR con-  
nector and phone jack, the phone input takes  
priority (see page 33).  
Both the [BAL] XLR connector and [UNBAL/  
GUITAR] phone jack are provided. You can  
connect a guitar, microphone, keyboard, etc.  
If you connect sources to both the XLR con-  
nector and phone jack, the phone input takes  
priority. When using the [INPUT A] section,  
select the [INPUT A SELECT] switch on the  
rear panel appropriately according to your  
usage (see page 33).  
2.  
[INSERT] connector (TRS phone jack)  
Connects an external effect processor (typi-  
cally, a compressor/limiter, etc.).  
For connection between the MR-8HD/CD and  
the effect processor, use a Y-cable as shown  
below (see page 59).  
4.  
[INPUT C] input connectors  
(XLR connector and phone jack)  
You can connect a microphone, keyboard,  
etc. to the [INPUT C] input.  
Both the [BAL] XLR connector and [UNBAL]  
phone jack are provided so you can use the  
appropriate connector according to the  
sound source.  
If you connect sources to both the XLR con-  
nector and phone jack, the phone input takes  
priority (see page 33).  
To the effect input.  
TIP: SEND  
GND  
RING: RETURN  
From the effect output.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Names and functions)  
5.  
[INPUT D] input connectors  
14. [REC SELECT] keys  
Used to select the recording track(s). You can  
record onto up to four tracks simultaneously.  
Pressing a key arms or unarms the corre-  
sponding track(s).  
Tracks 5/6 or 7/8 are armed or unarmed  
simultaneously (see pages 34 through 42).  
(XLR connector and phone jack)  
You can connect a microphone, keyboard,  
etc. to the [INPUT D] input.  
Both the [BAL] XLR connector and [UNBAL]  
phone jack are provided so you can use the  
appropriate connector according to the  
sound source. If you connect sources to both  
the XLR connector and phone jack, the phone  
input takes priority (see page 33).  
15. [PAN] controls  
Control panning for tracks 1 through 4.  
16. [EFFECT SEND] controls  
Control the amount of signals from tracks 1  
through 4 sent to the internal effect (reverb  
or delay) (see page 61).  
6.  
7.  
[STEREO OUT] jacks (L, R)  
These jacks output the stereo (L and R) buss  
signals. Connect these jacks to the monitor-  
ing equipment or master recorder (see pages  
29 and 41).  
17. Insert effect selection keys  
Used to select the insert effect (mic simula-  
tion or amp simulation) for the signal from  
the [INPUT A] jack.  
[PHONES] jacks (1, 2)  
Two jacks (1 and 2) are provided. You can  
use two pairs of stereo headphones with the  
MR-8HD/CD (see page 29).  
When setting the [INPUT A SELECT] switch  
on the rear panel to "MIC/LINE", you can use  
the mic simulation effect. When setting the  
switch to "GTR/DIST", you can use the guitar  
amp simulation effect (see page 58).  
8.  
9.  
[PHONES VOL] control  
Adjusts the headphone output level (see  
page 30).  
[POWER] switch  
18. [TO STEREO BUSS ON/OFF] keys  
Each key selects whether or not sending the  
corresponding input signal to the stereo L/  
R busses (see page 72). Each press of the  
key alternates ON and OFF. When ON, the  
key illuminates in green. When OFF, it is  
unlit. When the corresponding input is as-  
signed to a recording track, the key flashes  
in green.  
Switches between standby mode and power  
on (see page 28). To turn off the power when  
the power is on, press and hold down the  
[POWER] switch for a few seconds.  
<Note>: This switch cannot turn off the  
power completely. When this switch is "up",  
the MR-8HD/CD enters standby mode (i.e.  
the power does not completely turned off).  
Therefore, if you do not use the MR-8HD/  
CD for a long time, we recommend unplug-  
ging the power cord from the AC outlet.  
A long press of the key enters the input menu  
of the MENU mode, in which you can set  
phantom power on/off, panning, etc. (see  
page 128).  
10. [REVERB/DELAYTIME] control  
This control adjusts the reverb time or de-  
lay time. When you select "ROOM", "HALL"  
or "PLATE" for the effect type, it adjusts the  
reverb time.When you select "DELAY", it  
adjusts the delay time. (See page 61.)  
19. [PEAK] indicators  
Each indicator lights when the input signal  
is overloaded (see page 15). You should ad-  
just the input gain using the [TRIM] control  
so that the [PEAK] indicator does not light.  
11. [EFFECT] keys  
20. [DISTORTION] control  
These keys are used to select the effect type.  
You can select from three reverb types  
(ROOM, HALL and PLATE) and a delay  
(DELAY). The selected key is lit (see page 60).  
Controls the amount of the distortion effect  
for a guitar connected to the [XLR] connec-  
tor or [UNBAL/GUITAR] jack (phone type) on  
the [INPUT A] channel.  
This control is effective only when the [IN-  
PUT A SELECT] switch is set to "GTR/DIST"  
(see pages 35 through 40).  
12. [MASTER] fader  
Adjusts the stereo (L and R) buss output level  
(see pages 30 through 39).  
21. [TRIM] controls  
13. Track faders  
Each control adjusts the input gain of the  
corresponding input channel (see page 15,  
and 35 through 40).  
Each fader adjusts the track playback level.  
Each of track faders 5/6 and 7/8 controls  
the stereo signal (see pages 30 through 39).  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Names and functions)  
Top panel 2  
24  
28  
25 26 27  
22 23  
29  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT B  
BAL  
INPUT C  
BAL  
INPUT D  
BAL  
STEREO OUT  
L
1
R
PHONES  
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
2
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
TRIM  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
30  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A / IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
31  
32  
33  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
37  
34  
26. [CONTRAST] key  
35  
36  
22. [RHYTHM GUIDE] key  
By rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob while  
holding down this key, you can adjust the  
display contrast (see page 25).  
Switches on/off of the rhythm guide func-  
tion (see page 76). Each press of the switch  
alternates on and off. A long press of the  
key enters the rhythm guide menu, in which  
you can set the rhythm guide parameters  
(see page 76).  
27. [7/8 > STEREO WAV FILE] / G H I 3 key  
This key is used when converting a mono  
WAV file recorded on tracks 7/8 to a stereo  
WAV file (see page 90). A converted stereo  
WAV file can be exported to a USB-connected  
personal computer (see page 92), or can be  
burned to an audio CD using the internal  
CD-R/RW drive or an external CD-R/RW  
drive (see the supplementary manual "How  
to use the CD-R/RW drive").  
23. [BOUNCE 1-4 > 5/6, 1-6 > 7/8] / A B C 1 key  
Selects the bounce mode (see pages 66 and  
68).  
In the menu mode, this key is used for char-  
acter entry of A, B, C, a, b, c and 1 (see pages  
32 and 99).  
In the menu mode, this key is used for char-  
acter entry of G, H, I, g, h, i and 3 (see pages  
32 and 99).  
24. [TIME BASE SEL] key  
Selects the time base shown on the display  
(see page 24). Each press of the key switch  
between "time" and "bar/beat".  
28. LCD display  
This 132 x 64 dot LCD display shows vari-  
ous information (see page 24).  
25. [BOUNCE 1-8 > NEW SONG] / D E F 2 key  
Selects the bounce mode (see page 70).  
In the menu mode, this key is used for char-  
acter entry of D, E, F, d, e, f and 2 (see pages  
32 and 99).  
29. [MENU/ENTER] rotary / push knob  
Pressing this knob enters the menu mode.  
In the menu mode, rotating this knob se-  
lects the item or numeric value, while press-  
ing this knob confirm the setting/selection.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Names and functions)  
• [STOP] + [REWIND] (LOCATE ABS ZERO)  
Locates to the beginning (ABS ZERO) of the  
current song (see page 48).  
30. [MASTERING] keys  
(POWERFUL / NATURAL / BRIGHT)  
Used to select the desired mastering effect  
during track bounce or mixdown. You can  
select from three effect types by pressing an  
appropriate key (see page 62).  
In the menu mode, the [POWERFUL] key is  
used for character entry of J, K, L, j, k, l and  
4, while the [NATURAL] key is used for char-  
acter entry of M, N, O, m, n, o and 5 (see  
pages 32 and 99).  
• [STOP] + [F FWD] (LOCATE REC END)  
Locates to the recording end of the current  
song (REC END) (see page 48).  
[RECORD] key  
Pressing the [PLAY] key while holding down  
the [RECORD] key starts recording of the  
armed (record-ready) track(s).  
By pressing only the [RECORD] key when any  
track(s) is armed (in record-ready), the in-  
put signal(s) of the armed track(s) can be  
monitored (i.e. input monitor mode). (see  
pages 35 through 40).  
31. [UNDO/REDO] / [DELETE] key  
Used to undo or redo recording or editing  
(see pages 36, 38, 40).  
Each press of the key alternates "undo" and  
"redo". In the menu mode, this key is used  
for deleting a character (see pages 32 and  
99).  
[F FWD] key  
Pressing this key fast forwards the recorder.  
During playback, pressing this key starts 3 x  
cueing (see page 44).  
While holding down the [STOP] key, press-  
ing this key locates to the recording end of  
the current song (REC END) (see page 48).  
32. [STORE] / + - _ 0 key  
Stores the current recorder position (time  
data) as the LOCATE A/IN or LOCATE B/OUT  
point (see pages 49 and 54).  
In the "2-mix file playback" mode, pressing this  
key sets a CUE point to the current stereo  
WAV file (see the supplementary manual  
"How to use the CD-R/RW drive").  
In the menu mode, this key is used for char-  
acter entry of +, -, _ and 0 (see pages 32 and  
99).  
[REWIND] key  
Pressing this key rewinds the recorder.  
During playback, pressing this key starts 3 x  
reverse cueing (see page 44).  
While holding down the [STOP] key, press-  
ing this key locates to the beginning (ABS  
ZERO) of the current song (see page 48).  
This key is also used to go up the menu  
screen layer while a menu screen is dis-  
played.  
33. [LOCATE B/OUT] /Y Z 9 key  
Pressing this key while holding down the  
[STORE] key sets the LOCATE B point (or  
punch out point) (see page 49 and 54).  
In the menu mode, this key is used for char-  
acter entry of Y, Z, y, z and 9 (see pages 32  
and 99).  
35. [LOCATE A/IN] / V W X 8 key  
Pressing this key while holding down the  
[STORE] key sets the LOCATE A point (or  
punch in point) (see page 49 and 54).  
In the menu mode, this key is used for char-  
acter entry of V, W, X, v, w, x and 8 (see pages  
32 and 99).  
34. Transport keys  
[PLAY] key  
Starts playback of the recorder.  
Pressing this key while holding down the  
[RECORD] key starts recording of the armed  
(record-ready) track(s).  
36. [PLAY MODE] / ST U 7 key  
Pressing this key during recording exits re-  
cording.  
Selects a play mode. You can select from  
among normal, auto play, auto return and  
loop (see page 45).  
In the menu mode, this key is used for char-  
acter entry of S, T, U, s, t, u and 7 (see pages  
32 and 99).  
[STOP] key  
Stops the recorder.  
By pressing the [PLAY], [REWIND] or [F FWD]  
key while holding down the [STOP] key, you  
can locate to a specific point or repeat play-  
back as below.  
37. [AUTO PUNCH] / P Q R 6 key  
Turns on or off the auto punch mode (see  
page 55).  
In the menu mode, this key is used for char-  
acter entry of P, Q, R, p, q, r and 6 (see pages  
32 and 99).  
• [STOP] + [PLAY] (A-B PLAY)  
Repeats playback between the LOCATE A and  
LOCATE B points (see page 44).  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Names and functions)  
Rear panel  
1
2
INPUT A SEL  
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
GTR DIST  
DIGITAL  
AC-IN  
USB  
USB HOST  
MIDI OUT  
OUT  
FOOT SW  
6
5
7
4
3
3.  
[FOOT SW] jack (TRS phone jack)  
Used to connect with an unlatched-type  
footswitch (see page 53).  
1.  
2.  
[AC IN] connector  
Connect the supplied power cord to this con-  
nector (see page 28).  
[INPUT A SELECT] switch  
This switch must be set appropriately accord-  
ing to the input source of the [INPUT A] chan-  
nel (see page 33).  
Either of the [BAL] XLR and  
[UNBAL/GUITAR] phone connec-  
tors can be used. Set the switch to  
unlatched-type footswitch  
MIC/LINE  
this position when the source is an  
external microphone or line level  
source.  
4.  
[DIGITAL OUT] connector  
(Toslink optical connector)  
Used to connect with an external digital de-  
vice using an optical cable (see page 42).  
Either of the [BAL] XLR and  
[UNBAL/GUITAR] phone connec-  
tors can be used. You can adjust  
the input level and distortion using  
<Note>: The dust protec-  
tion cap is inserted to  
the [DIGITAL OUT] con-  
nector when the unit is  
GTR DIST  
the [TRIM] and [DISTORTION]  
controls respectively. You can also  
use the amp simulation insert ef-  
fect.  
shipped.  
Remove the cap when you use this connec-  
tor. If you do not use this connector, attach  
the dust protection cap.  
Either of the [BAL] XLR and  
[UNBAL/GUITAR] phone connec-  
tors can be used. You can adjust  
GTR CLEAN  
the input level using the [TRIM]  
control. You can also use the amp  
simulation insert effect.  
If you need to connect the  
unit to a digital device which  
only provides a coaxial type  
digital connector (typically,  
an RCA pin jack), use the  
Fostex COP-1/96k coaxial-  
optical converter (shown  
right).  
Model COP-1/96k  
Use an optical digital  
cable with Toslink plugs  
on both ends.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Names and functions)  
5.  
6.  
[MIDI OUT] jack (DIN 5-pin connector)  
Used to connect to a MIDI IN jack of an ex-  
ternal MIDI device (such as a MIDI se-  
quencer) (see page 86).  
7.  
[USB] port (USB B type)  
Used to connect with a personal computer  
using a standard USB cable for song file data  
transfer between the MR-8HD/CD and the  
personal computer (see page 92).  
[USB HOST] connector (USB A type)  
Used to connect to an external CD-R/RW  
drive for creating an audio CD (CD-DA). See  
the supplementary manual "How to use the  
CD-R/RW drive" for details.  
<Caution>: Do not connect your personal  
computer to the [USB HOST] port.  
Side panel  
1
1.  
Internal CD-R/RW drive  
Used to create an original audio CD by burn-  
ing converted stereo WAV files to a CD-R/  
RW disc, or used to record a single mono  
WAV file converted from track data on the  
HDD to a CD-R/RW disc (see the supplemen-  
tary manual "How to use the CD-R/RW drive"  
for details).  
<Caution>: Although you can see the DVD-  
ROM logo on the front of the CD-R/RW drive  
tray, it does not support DVD ROM discs.  
Only CD-R/RW discs can be used.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Names and functions)  
LCD display  
The following describes details about the LCD display, including screen contents and opera-  
tion.  
Home screen  
When turning on the MR-8HD/CD, the display shows the startup screen (showing the startup status of the  
MR-8HD/CD), followed by the "Home" screen, which is similar to the one below. In this condition, the  
previously loaded song is loaded and the recorder is located at the beginning of the song.  
The home screen provides the following information.  
1
2
6
5
3
4
1.  
2.  
Time counter display  
4.  
Stereo buss (L and R) level display  
During recording or playback, the output lev-  
els of the L/R stereo buss are shown.  
Time information of the current recorder po-  
sition is shown in ABS or bar/beat mode (by  
default, bar/beat). Using the [TIME BASE SE-  
LECT] key, you can select a desired time base  
mode. When the recorder is moving (playing  
back, fast forwarding, etc.), the appropriate  
icon is also shown. While the hard disk drive is  
in access, " ACC " lights up.  
5.  
Song status display  
Lights up the following status icons when the  
appropriate modes (functions) are active.  
At least one of the tracks is in the  
input monitor mode (see pages  
36, 38 and 40).  
Character display  
Normally, the name of the song currently  
loaded is shown (up 16 characters can be  
shown at a time).  
It also shows following information.  
• A name of the operation mode currently  
being executed (such as "BOUNCE 1-6->7/8).  
• A (not-so-serious) warning message  
• The "Remain" time when at least one track is  
record-armed (i.e. At least one of the  
[REC SELECT] keys is active).  
The auto punch mode is active  
(see page 55).  
The auto return mode is active  
(see page 45).  
The loop mode is active (see page  
45).  
The auto play mode is active (see  
page 45).  
The remain time shows how much time you  
can further record audio data onto a mono  
track using the available space left on the hard  
disk.  
6.  
Song number display  
Shows the song number of the song currently  
loaded. Also, " " is lit when the phantom power  
is on.  
3.  
Track level display  
The recording or playback levels of tracks 1  
through 8 are shown. When a track is record  
armed, the track number indication changes  
to the source input channel (any of A, B, C and  
D).  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Names and functions)  
Selecting a time base mode  
When the display shows the home screen, pressing the [TIME BASE SELECT] key switches the time base  
mode between ABS and bar/beat.  
Example of bar/beat display  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
CONTRAST  
1-4  
1-6  
>
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
SONG  
STEREO  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
7/8  
>
BOUNCE  
MENU/ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
Example of ABS display  
[TIME BASE SELECT] key  
Adjusting the display contrast  
You can adjust the display contrast by rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob while holding down the [CON-  
TRAST] key. Rotating the dial clockwise heightens the contrast, while rotating it counterclockwise lowers  
the contrast.  
<High contrast>  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
CONTRAST  
1-4  
1-6  
>
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
SONG  
STEREO  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
7/8  
>
BOUNCE  
MENU/ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
[MENU/ENTER] knob  
[CONTRAST] key  
<Low contrast>  
While pressing down the [CONTRAST] key, the dis-  
play shows "CONTRAST -> DIAL".  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Names and functions)  
MENU screen  
Pressing the [MENU/ENTER] knob while the recorder is stopped enters the menu mode and brings up the  
menu screen.  
In the menu mode, you can make setting or editing via the appropriate screen. The top menu screen has  
two pages, in which you can select the desired menu by rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
<First page>  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
CONTRAST  
1-4 > 5/6  
1-6 > 7/8  
NEW  
1-8 >  
STEREO  
7/8 >  
SONG  
WAV FILE  
BOUNCE  
MENU/ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
<Second page>  
[MENU/ENTER] knob  
Warning message  
If a serious problem happens to the MR-8HD/CD during operation, an appropriate warning message is  
shown on the display. Most warning messages are being shown until the [MENU/ENTER] knob is pressed.  
Note that there are also not-so-serious warning messages besides the following.  
During recording, this  
message is shown if  
there is no more space  
left on the hard disk for  
recording.  
This message is shown  
when you are going to  
delete a song which is  
protected.  
This message is shown  
when you are going to  
make recording or ed-  
iting to a song which is  
protected.  
This message is shown  
when the hard disk  
drive has a problem.  
This message is shown  
when you are going to  
edit a track or part but  
there is not enough  
space on the hard disk  
for executing the undo  
function.  
This message is shown  
when you are going to  
create a new song  
while 99 songs exist on  
the hard disk.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
Basic operations  
This chapter describes power connection, power on/off, demo song play-  
back, etc., as well as basic multitrack recording.  
If it is the first time for you to use a Multitracker, read this chapter  
carefully first so that you are familiar with the MR-8HD/CD basic opera-  
tions, then read other sections which describe advanced operations.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
About power  
The MR-8HD/CD operates by AC power. Before you start using the MR-8HD/CD, you must con-  
nect the supplied power cord.  
Power connection  
Connect between the [AC IN] connector on the MR-8HD/CD rear panel and an AC outlet using the  
supplied power cord. The MR-8HD/CD enters the standby mode when the power cord is connected.  
INPUT A SEL  
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
GTR DIST  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
USB  
USB HOST  
MIDI OUT  
FOOT SW  
[AC IN] connector  
AC outlet  
Supplied power cord  
About the standby mode  
The standby mode is the condition when the power cord is connected and the [POWER]  
switch is set to OFF. In the standby mode, a small amount of power is consumed and the  
indicator of the [POWER] switch flashes slowly.  
<Note>: When you do not operate the MR-8HD/CD for a long period of time, we recom-  
mend disconnecting the power cord.  
Turning on the unit  
You can turn on or off the MR-8HD/CD power using the [POWER] switch (pointed by an arrow below).  
To turn off the power, press and hold down the [POWER] switch for a few seconds.  
When you press the [POWER] switch to  
turn on the power for the first time, the  
MR-8HD/CD starts up and the display  
shows the screen as below (note that it  
takes some time until the screen as be-  
low is shown).  
This screen shows that the demo song is  
loaded and stopped at the beginning (ABS  
0) of the song named "FOSTEX_FEVER".  
[POWER] switch  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
TRIM  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
WAV FILE  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A
/
IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
4
1
2
3
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
Follow the procedure described on the  
next page to play back the demo song.  
MIN  
MIN  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
Listening the demo song  
A demo song is pre-recorded on the hard disk of the MR-8HD/CD when shipped.  
Before you make recording, let's listen to the demo song via headphones (or a monitor speaker).  
Connecting headphones (or a monitor speaker system)  
Connect headphones to either of the two [PHONES] jacks of the MR-8HD/CD. Both jacks feed the same  
signal so you may connect headphones whichever you like.  
If you have a powered monitor speaker, you may connect it to the [STEREO OUT] L or R jacks of the  
MR-8HD/CD.  
Powered monitor  
speaker  
Headphones  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT B  
BAL  
INPUT C  
BAL  
INPUT D  
BAL  
EREO OU
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
WAV FILE  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A / IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
4
1
2
3
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
<Note>: You can plug a 1/4" phone plug to the  
[STEREO OUT] L or R jack.  
<Note>: When you connect a powered monitor  
speaker to the unit, turn down the volume of the  
powered monitor speaker to minimum before you  
turn on the MR-8HD/CD and the powered moni-  
tor speaker.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
Playing back the demo song  
In the demo song, approximately 1-minute audio is recorded on all eight tracks. Follow the procedure  
below for listening to the demo song. In the following procedure, it is assumed that the MR-8HD/CD  
is turned on and a pair of headphones (or a monitor speaker system) is connected.  
3
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT B  
BAL  
INPUT C  
BAL  
INPUT D  
BAL  
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
WAV FILE  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
Hint-1  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A / IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
4
1
2
3
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
Hint-2  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
2
1
1,3  
4
1)  
Raise the [MASTER] fader to the " " position.  
Set the track faders at the lowest position.  
<Note>: The demo song is protected and you can-  
not overwrite or erase it. Therefore, you cannot  
make recording in this condition.  
If you want to make new recording while keep-  
ing the demo tape on the hard disk, see "Creat-  
ing a song for recording" on the next page.  
If you do not keep the demo song, carry out ei-  
ther of the following operations.  
2)  
3)  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.  
Raise the track faders (1 through 8) gradually to  
adjust the playback level and balance.  
Also raise the [PHONES VOL] control gradually  
to adjust the headphones level. (If you are  
using a powered monitor speaker for  
monitoring, adjust the level control of the  
powered speaker.)  
(1)  
Release the song protection (see page  
101).  
<Hint-1>: While listening to the playback  
sound, adjust panning setting of tracks 1  
through 4, as well as try to adjust the inter-  
nal effects (reverb/delay) (see page 60).  
Then, start recording (overwrite  
recording) from the beginning of the demo  
song, or delete the demo song from the  
hard disk. If you delete the demo song,  
create a new song (see the next page) and  
make recording to the new song.  
4)  
When the demo song ends, press the [STOP] key  
to stop the recorder.  
<Hint-2>:To listen to the demo song again:  
When the recorder is stopped after listen-  
ing to the demo song, press the [REWIND]  
key while holding down the [STOP] key.  
The recorder instantly moves back to the  
beginning of the demo song (see page 48).  
Then pressing the [PLAY] key starts play-  
back from the beginning of the demo song.  
(2)  
Format the hard disk (see page 124) and  
make recording.  
Because a new song is automatically  
created after formatting the disk, you can  
start recording without the need of  
creating a new song manually.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
Creating a song for recording  
This section describes how to create a new song for recording on the hard disk, while keeping the  
demo song. In the following procedure, it is assumed that the MR-8HD/CD is stopped at the  
beginning (ABS ZERO) of the demo song.  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially.  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"- - -:(New Song)", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The display now shows the screen for entering  
a new song name. The rightmost character on  
the default song name is flashing (in the ex-  
ample below, "2" of "Song02" starts flashing).  
<Note>: By selecting " Back" and pressing  
the [MENU/ENTER] knob, the display returns  
to the previous screen. You can also return  
the display to the previous screen by press-  
ing the [REWIND] key.  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Song ",  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
song menu screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially.  
Flashing  
5)  
Enter the desired song name.  
Use the character entry keys to enter the de-  
sired character at the flashing point.  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
flashing point. Use the [UNDO/REDO]/[DELETE]  
key to delete the character at the flashing point.  
Therefore, when the rightmost character is  
flashing as in the screen example above, you  
can delete all characters by pressing the [UNDO/  
REDO]/[DELETE] key repeatedly. You can en-  
ter up to 16 characters for a song name.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Select Song ", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
song selection screen. You can see the list of  
the song numbers/names on the hard disk.  
Currently, only the demo song is created, and  
"S01: FOSTEX_FEVER" and "---:(New Song)" are  
shown.  
See <How to enter characters> on the next page  
for entering the song name as "My_Song".  
<Note>: You may leave the default song  
name as it is. Also, you can edit the song  
name after creating a song using the "Re-  
name Song" menu item in the song menu  
of the menu mode (see page 99).  
"---:(New Song)" is used to create a new song.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
<Note>: If you want to cancel creating a song,  
rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
cursor to "[CANCEL]" and press the [MENU/  
ENTER] knob.  
<How to enter characters>  
<Character entry keys>  
Some keys on the MR-8HD/CD top  
panel act as character entry keys in  
the menu mode. For example, the  
PLAY MODE  
7)  
While “[ENTER]” is flashing, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
[PLAY MODE] key (shown at the left)  
can be used for entering S, T, U, s, t,  
u and 7. Each press of a character  
entry key switches the character to  
be entered among those assigned to  
the key.  
The display now shows the home screen of the  
newly created song (My_Song).  
As shown in the lower screen example, the song  
name (My_Song) and the song number  
(Song02) are shown.  
STU7  
<Character entry example>  
The following procedure example shows how to en-  
ter "My_Song" as a song name.  
1. Use the [NATURAL] key to enter "M".  
2. Use the [LOCATE B/OUT] key to enter "y".  
3. Use the [STORE] key to enter "_".  
Flashing  
4. Use the [PLAY MODE] key to enter "S".  
5. Use the [NATURAL] key to enter "o".  
6. Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
cursor right.  
Now, in addition to the demo song, a new  
song on which no audio is recorded is cre-  
ated by the procedure above.  
7. Use the [NATURAL] key to enter "n".  
8. Use the [7/8>STEREO WAV FILE] key to  
enter "g".  
It is a good idea to create more than one  
song before you start recording.  
<Notes on cursor movement>  
Pressing a different character entry key automati-  
cally moves the cursor right.  
If two successive characters are assigned to the  
same character entry key, rotate the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob after selecting the first character to move  
the cursor right.  
After creating a song or songs for recording,  
connect the sound source to the MR-8HD/  
CD (see the next page) and start recording.  
<Note>: After creating a new song, by ex-  
ecuting procedure steps 1 through 3, the  
following song selection screen appears.  
This screen is used for loading the desired  
song from the list, as well as creating a new  
song.  
For example, by rotating the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob to highlight “S01: FOSTEX_FEVER” and  
pressing the [MENU/ENTER] knob, you can  
load the demo song.  
6)  
After completing song name entry, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The cursor moves to “[ENTER]” at the bottom  
of the screen.  
Flashing  
For details about how to select the desired  
song, see "Song management" on page 97.  
Flashing  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
Input connection  
Input channel  
The MR-8HD/CD provides four input channels: [INPUT A], [INPUT B], [INPUT C] and [INPUT D].  
Each channel provides both the XLR and 1/4" phone connectors.  
INPUT B INPUT C INPUT D  
INPUT A  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT B  
BAL  
INPUT C  
BAL  
INPUT D  
BAL  
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
Input channel  
Available input connectors  
Shapes of connectable connector  
Either of the XLR (balanced) con-  
nector or phone (unbalanced) jack  
can be used (if both connectors  
are plugged, the phone jack is ef-  
fective).  
INPUT A  
INPUT B  
INPUT C  
INPUT D  
PHONE plug  
XLR-3-12C type  
When you use the [INPUT A] channel, set the [INPUT A SELECT] switch on the rear panel  
appropriately.  
If you use a condenser microphone, use the XLR (balanced) connector. The MR-8HD/CD can  
supply the phantom power (see page 128).  
[INPUT A SELECT] switch  
When you use the [INPUT A] channel, you must set the [INPUT A SELECT] switch on the rear panel  
appropriately.  
“MIC/LINE” position  
Both the [BAL] XLR and [UNBAL/GUI-  
TAR] phone connectors can be used.  
Set the switch to this position when the  
source is an external microphone or  
line level source.  
[INPUT A SELECT] switch  
INPUT A SEL  
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
GTR DIST  
Both the [BAL] XLR and [UNBAL/GUI-  
TAR] phone connectors can be used.  
You can adjust the input level and dis-  
tortion using the [TRIM] and [DISTOR-  
TION] controls respectively. You can  
also use the amp simulation insert ef-  
fect.  
“GTR DIST” position  
INPUT A SEL  
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
GTR DIST  
INPUT A SEL  
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
GTR DIST  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
B HOST  
MIDI OUT  
FOOT SW  
“GTR CLEAN” position  
Both the [BAL] XLR and [UNBAL/GUI-  
TAR] phone connectors can be used.  
You can adjust the input level using the  
[TRIM] control. You can also use the  
amp simulation insert effect.  
INPUT A SEL  
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
GTR DIST  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
Recording track combinations and available input channel(s)  
The following shows the recording track combinations and available input channel(s) by the number  
of tracks simultaneously recorded.  
Recording to two tracks simultaneously  
Recording to a single track  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
1
Trk 1 and 2  
1
2
2
3
4
Trk 3 and 4  
Trk 5 and 6  
Trk 7 and 8  
Trk 1 and 3  
Trk 1 and 4  
Trk 2 and 3  
Trk 2 and 4  
3
5/6  
4
7/8  
Only [INPUT A] is available.  
1
1
3
3
You can record only the [INPUT A] channel signal to the  
selected track. The channels from [INPUT B] to [INPUT  
D] are not available.  
4
4
2
2
Recording to three tracks simultaneously  
Trk 1, 2 and 3  
Trk 1, 2 and 4  
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
[INPUT A] and [INPUT B] are available.  
The [INPUT A] channel signal is assigned to the track  
with the lower number, while the [INPUT B] channel sig-  
nal is assigned to the track with the higher number.  
4
4
2
Trk 1, 3 and 4  
Trk 1, 5 and 6  
Trk 1, 7 and 8  
Trk 2, 3 and 4  
Trk 2, 5 and 6  
Trk 2, 7 and 8  
Trk 3, 5 and 6  
5/6  
Recording to four tracks simultaneously  
7/8  
4
1
1
2
2
3
Trk 1, 2, 3 and 4  
Trk 1, 2, 5 and 6  
2
2
3
4
5/6  
5/6  
5/6  
5/6  
5/6  
5/6  
5/6  
5/6  
5/6  
7/8  
7/8  
7/8  
1
2
Trk 1, 2, 7 and 8  
Trk 3, 4, 5 and 6  
Trk 3, 4, 7 and 8  
3
3
3
3
4
4
7/8  
7/8  
7/8  
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
Trk 3, 7 and 8  
Trk 4, 5 and 6  
Trk 4, 7 and 8  
Trk 1, 3, 5 and 6  
Trk 1, 3, 7 and 8  
Trk 1, 4, 5 and 6  
Trk 1, 4, 7 and 8  
Trk 2, 3, 5 and 6  
Trk 2, 3, 7 and 8  
Trk 2, 4, 5 and 6  
Trk 2, 4, 7 and 8  
4
4
4
4
[INPUT A], [INPUT B] and [INPUT C] are available.  
The [INPUT A] channel signal is assigned to the track  
with the lowest number, the [INPUT B] signal assigned  
to the track with the next lowest number, and the [IN-  
PUT C] signal is assigned to the track with the highest  
number.  
7/8  
7/8  
7/8  
3
3
2
2
2
2
4
4
<Example of input assignment to tracks>  
If you make recording to tracks 2, 4, 7 and 8, input-to-  
track assignment is as follows.  
All input channels are available.  
The [INPUT A] channel signal is assigned to the track  
with the lowest number, the [INPUT B] signal assigned  
to the track with the next lowest number, the [INPUT C]  
signal is assigned to the track with the second highest  
number, and the [INPUT D] signal is assigned to the  
track with the highest number.  
INPUT A ->Track 2  
INPUT B ->Track 4  
INPUT C ->Track 7  
INPUT D ->Track 8  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
Recording onto a single track  
You can record onto any one of tracks 1 through 4. When making recording to a single track, you  
can record a signal fed to the [INPUT A] channel.  
The following describes the procedure for recording an acoustic guitar onto track 1 via a micro-  
phone. We assume that Song02 is loaded and no sound is recorded to Song02. See "Creating a  
song for recording" on page 31 for details about how to create a song.  
2
INPUT A SEL  
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
1
GTR DIST  
6
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT B  
BAL  
INPUT C  
BAL  
INPUT D  
BAL  
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
TRIM  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
6
3
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
SELECT  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A / IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
7
9
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
N  
MIN  
10  
5 8  
4
4
3)  
Press the [REC SELECT] key for track 1.  
Track 1 is record armed and the [REC SELECT]  
key for track 1 starts flashing.  
On the home screen, the remaining time is  
shown, while "1" for the track number changes  
to "A".  
Preparation for recording  
1)  
Connect a microphone to the [BAL] or  
[UNBAL/GUITAR] input connector of the  
[INPUT A] channel.  
<Note>: You can supply the phantom power  
to a condenser microphone connected to  
the [BAL] XLR connector (see page 128).  
Note that you cannot supply the phantom  
power via the [GUITAR/UNBAL] phone con-  
nector.  
2)  
Set the [INPUT A SELECT] switch to "MIC/LINE".  
4)  
Set track fader 1 and [MASTER] fader to the  
nominal position (marked by ).  
Raising these faders allows you to monitor the  
input sound. If these faders are not raised, you  
cannot monitor the sound via headphones.  
<Note>: You can apply the mic simulation  
as insert effects when the [INPUT A SELECT]  
switch to "MIC/LINE" (see page 58).  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
Starting recording  
<Note>: The fader for track 1 is used to ad-  
just the monitor level. To adjust the record-  
ing level, use the [TRIM] control of the [IN-  
PUT A] channel.  
7)  
8)  
While holding down the [RECORD] key, press the  
[PLAY] key to start recording.  
The guitar is recorded.  
5)  
Press the [RECORD] key once (the key indicator  
starts flashing).  
Track 1 (which is record armed) now enters  
When recording completes, press the [STOP] key  
to stop the recorder.  
the input monitor mode and "  
shown on the home screen.  
" is  
<Note>: We recommend to press the [REC  
SELECT] key for track 1 to unarm track 1.  
Playing back the recorded track  
9)  
Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the  
[STOP] key to locate the recorder to the  
beginning of the song.  
10)  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.  
You can adjust the monitor level using the track  
1 fader, as well as the [MASTER] fader and  
[PHONES VOL] control.  
6)  
While playing the guitar, adjust the recording level  
using the [TRIM] control of the [INPUT A]  
channel.  
If you are not satisfied with the result, use  
the undo/redo function to cancel the re-  
cording and try again.  
Adjust the level appropriately so that the PEAK  
indicator does not light.  
Turning the [PHONES VOL] control clockwise  
raises the headphone monitor level.  
Undoing recording (undo/redo)  
The screen shows the input level of track 1, as  
well as the stereo L and R output levels.  
If you press the [UNDO/REDO] key after finishing  
recording, you can return to the condition before  
the recording started (UNDO operation). Therefore,  
you can try recording again.  
If you press the [UNDO/REDO] key again (after  
UNDO), the undo operation is canceled and you  
can return to the condition when the recording  
finished (REDO operation).  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
MASTERING  
LOCATE  
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
<Note>: Adjust the [TRIM] control properly  
so that the PEAK indicator does not light at  
the loudest part of the guitar sound. If the  
input level is too high, the PEAK indicator  
lights and the sound may be distorted or  
noisy.  
[UNDO/REDO] key  
YZ9  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
END  
ZERO  
<Tip>: When receiving a line level signal, set  
the [TRIM] control to left ("LINE") to get the  
appropriate level. When receiving a micro-  
phone signal, set the [TRIM] control to right  
("MIC") to get the appropriate level.  
<Notes>: The undo/redo function is available for  
all kind of recordings, however, if you carry out  
any of the following operations after making re-  
cording, you cannot undo the recording.  
• Carrying out new recording.  
• Carrying out track or part editing.  
• Turning off the power.  
• Selecting another song or editing the song name.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
Overdubbing basics  
Overdubbing is recording something new while listening to the previously recorded track(s).  
It is a very important method in multitrack recording. The following describes an example of  
overdubbing for recording a stereo keyboard to tracks 7/8 while listening to the guitar on track  
1. See the procedure previously described in "Recording onto a single track" for details about how  
to record a guitar on track 1. In the procedure below, we assume that the song of which the  
guitar has been recorded on track 1 is loaded.  
Note that you can make overdubbing to another track or other tracks in the same manner as  
described below.  
2
INPUT A SEL  
1
1
7
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
GTR DIST  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
TRIM  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
7
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A / IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
3
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
9
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
8,11  
8,10  
5
6,12  
4
4
4
This indicates you can now record the [INPUT  
A] and [INPUT B] channel signals to tracks 7  
and 8 respectively.  
Preparation for recording  
1)  
Connect the L and R outputs of the keyboard to  
input connectors of the [INPUT A] and [INPUT B]  
channels.  
Connect the L and R outputs to the [INPUT A]  
and [INPUT B] channels respectively.  
2)  
3)  
Set the [INPUT A SELECT] switch to "MIC/LINE".  
Press the [REC SELECT] key for tracks 7/8.  
Tracks 7/8 are record armed and the  
[REC SELECT] key for tracks 7/8 starts  
flashing.  
4)  
Set track faders 1 and 7/8 and the [MASTER] fader  
to the nominal position (marked by ).  
On the home screen, the remaining time is  
shown, while "7" and "8" for the track  
numbers change to "A" and "B" respectively.  
Raising these faders allows you to monitor the  
input sound. If these faders are not raised, you  
cannot monitor the sound via headphones.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
<Note>: Track 1 and 7/8 faders are used to  
adjust the monitor level. To adjust the re-  
cording levels, use the [TRIM] controls of the  
[INPUT A] and [INPUT B] channels.  
Starting recording  
9)  
While holding down the [RECORD] key, press the  
[PLAY] key to start recording.  
The recorder records the keyboard while  
playing back track 1 (guitar).  
5)  
Press the [RECORD] key once (the key indicator  
starts flashing).  
10)  
When recording completes, press the [STOP] key  
to stop the recorder.  
The armed tracks 7/8 now enter the input  
monitor mode, while "  
the home screen.  
" is shown on  
<Note>: We recommend to press the  
[REC SELECT] key for tracks 7/8 to unarm  
tracks 7/8.  
Playing back the recorded track  
11)  
12)  
Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the  
[STOP] key to locate the recorder to the  
beginning of the song.  
Adjusting the recording levels while listening to track 1  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.  
You can adjust the monitor level using the track  
faders, as well as the [MASTER] fader and  
[PHONES VOL] control.  
6)  
Press the [PLAY] key to play back the song from  
the beginning.  
Though tracks 7/8 are in the input monitor  
mode, you can hear the track 1 signal by  
rotating the [PHONES VOL] control clockwise  
(while the meter for track 1 shows the  
playback level).  
<Note>: If you are not satisfied with the re-  
sult, use the undo/redo function to cancel  
the recording and try again.  
7)  
While playing the keyboard, adjust the recording  
levels using the [TRIM] controls of the [INPUT A]  
and [INPUT B] channels.  
Adjust the levels appropriately so that the PEAK  
indicators for these input channels do not light.  
Undoing recording (undo/redo)  
If you press the [UNDO/REDO] key after finishing  
recording, you can return to the condition before  
the recording started (UNDO operation). Therefore,  
you can try recording again.  
If you press the [UNDO/REDO] key again (after  
UNDO), the undo operation is canceled and you  
can return to the condition when the recording  
finished (REDO operation).  
The home screen shows the playback level of  
track 1 and the input levels of tracks 7 and 8,  
as well as the stereo L and R output levels.  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
MASTERING  
LOCATE  
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
[UNDO/REDO] key  
YZ9  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
<Note>: Adjust each [TRIM] control properly  
so that the corresponding PEAK indicator  
does not light at the loudest part of the key-  
board sound.  
END  
ZERO  
<Tip>: When receiving a line level signal, set  
the [TRIM] control to left ("LINE") to get the  
appropriate level. When receiving a micro-  
phone signal, set the [TRIM] control to right  
("MIC") to get the appropriate level.  
<Notes>: The undo/redo function is available for  
all kind of recordings, however, if you carry out  
any of the following operations after making re-  
cording, you cannot undo the recording.  
8)  
After adjusting the recording levels properly,  
press the [REWIND] key while holding down the  
[STOP] key to locate the recorder to the  
beginning of the song.  
• Carrying out new recording.  
• Carrying out track or part editing.  
• Turning off the power.  
• Selecting another song or editing the song name.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
Recording onto four tracks simultaneously  
You can simultaneously record up to four tracks. See page 34 for the available combinations of  
four recording tracks. The following describes the procedure for recording different sound sources  
simultaneously to tracks 1 through 4. You can make four-track simultaneous recording with any  
available track combination in the same manner.  
2
INPUT A SEL  
1
1 1 1  
6
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
GTR DIST  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
TRIM  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
6
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A / IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
3
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
7
9
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
8
4
5
10  
4
3)  
Press the [REC SELECT] key for tracks 1 through  
4.  
Preparation for recording  
Tracks 1 through 4 are record armed and the  
[REC SELECT] keys for tracks 1 through 4 start  
flashing.  
1)  
Connect the following sound sources to the  
[INPUT A] through [INPUT D] channels.  
[INPUT A]  
[INPUT B]  
[INPUT C]  
[INPUT D]  
->  
->  
->  
->  
Electric guitar  
Electric bass  
Microphone (vocal)  
Drum machine  
On the home screen, track numbers "1"  
through "4" changes to "A" through "D"  
respectively, showing that each input is  
assigned to the appropriate track.  
The remaining time of the hard disk is shown.  
<Note>: If you connect a condenser micro-  
phone to the [BAL] XLR connector of the [IN-  
PUT C] channel, you can supply the phan-  
tom power to the microphone (see page  
128).  
2)  
Set the [INPUT A SELECT] switch to "GTR DIST".  
You can add distortion of the internal effects  
to your guitar sound.  
4)  
Set the track faders 1 through 4 and [MASTER]  
fader to the nominal position (marked by ).  
Raising these faders allows you to monitor the  
input sound. If these faders are not raised, you  
cannot monitor the sound via headphones.  
<Note>: You can apply the amp simulation  
as insert effects when the [INPUT A SELECT]  
switch is set to "GTR DIST" (see page 58).  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
Starting recording  
<Note>: Track faders 1 through 4 are used  
to adjust the monitor levels. To adjust the  
recording level, use the [TRIM] controls for  
[INPUT A] through [INPUT D].  
7)  
8)  
While holding down the [RECORD] key, press the  
[PLAY] key to start recording.  
The recorder starts recording.  
5)  
Press the [RECORD] key once (the key indicator  
starts flashing).  
Tracks 1 through 4 (which are armed) now  
enter the input monitor mode and  
When recording completes, press the [STOP] key  
to stop the recorder.  
<Note>: We recommend to press the [REC  
SELECT] key for tracks 1 through 4 to un-  
arm these tracks.  
"
" is shown on the home screen.  
Playing back the recorded track  
9)  
Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the  
[STOP] key to locate the recorder to the  
beginning of the song.  
10)  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.  
You can adjust the monitor level using track  
faders 1 through 4, as well as the [MASTER]  
fader and [PHONES VOL] control.  
6)  
While playing the music, adjust the recording  
level of each track using the [TRIM] control of  
each input channel.  
Adjust the level appropriately so that the PEAK  
indicator does not light.  
Turning the [PHONES VOL] control clockwise  
raises the headphone monitor level.  
<Tip>: If you are not satisfied with the re-  
sult, use the undo/redo function to cancel  
the recording and try again.  
The screen shows the input level of tracks 1  
through 4, as well as the stereo L and R output  
levels.  
Undoing recording (undo/redo)  
If you press the [UNDO/REDO] key after finishing  
recording, you can return to the condition before  
the recording started (UNDO operation). Therefore,  
you can try recording again.  
If you press the [UNDO/REDO] key again (after  
UNDO), the undo operation is canceled and you  
can return to the condition when the recording  
finished (REDO operation).  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
<Note>: Adjust the [TRIM] control of each  
input channel properly so that the PEAK  
indicator does not light at the loudest part  
of the sound.  
MASTERING  
LOCATE  
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
[UNDO/REDO] key  
YZ9  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
<Tip>: You can add distortion to an electric  
guitar connected to [INPUT A]. Use the [DIS-  
TORTION] control to adjust the distortion  
level. When you add distortion, readjust the  
[TRIM] control.  
END  
ZERO  
<Tip>: When receiving a line level signal, set  
the [TRIM] control to left ("LINE") to get the  
appropriate level. When receiving a micro-  
phone signal, set the [TRIM] control to right  
("MIC") to get the appropriate level.  
<Notes>: The undo/redo function is available for  
all kind of recordings, however, if you carry out  
any of the following operations after making re-  
cording, you cannot undo the recording.  
• Carrying out new recording.  
• Carrying out track or part editing.  
• Turning off the power.  
• Selecting another song or editing the song name.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
Basic mixdown  
This section describes basic mixdown which is the final process of multitrack recording. Mixdown  
mixes recorded materials on tracks 1 through 8 down to stereo. The mixdowned material can be  
recorded to an external master recorder.  
The MR-8HD/CD is equipped with the [DIGITAL OUT] connector, so you can record a mixdowned  
signal to a digital master recorder (DAT, MD, etc.) which can accept an S/P DIF digital signal in  
digital domain. With the MR-8HD/CD, you can also record a mixdowned signal internally to a  
new song of the MR-8HD/CD using the track bouncing function, without the need of an external  
master recorder (see "Track bouncing" described later).  
Track 1 (Playback)  
Track 2 (Playback)  
Track 3 (Playback)  
Track 4 (Playback)  
Track 5 (Playback)  
Track 6 (Playback)  
Track 7 (Playback)  
Track 8 (Playback)  
STEREO OUT (L)  
STEREO OUT (R)  
Analog signals  
Digital signal  
D/A  
DIGITAL OUT  
Mixdown to an analog recorder  
The following describes how to make mixdown recording to an external analog recorder.  
[STEREO OUT L, R]  
MR-8HD/CD  
INPUT  
A
SELECT  
INPUT  
BAL  
A
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
EREO O
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
TRIM  
PEAK  
MIN  
MAX LINE  
GUITAR  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
Analog master recorder  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
1)  
2)  
Connect the [STEREO OUT (L, R)] connectors of  
the MR-8HD/CD to the input connectors of an  
analog master recorder.  
3)  
4)  
Adjust the recording level of the master recorder  
while rehearsing mixdown.  
See the manual of the master recorder for  
details about how to adjust the recording level.  
While playing back the MR-8HD/CD, rehearse  
mixing down the recorded sounds by adjusting  
the level and panning of each track, applying  
effects to tracks 1 through 4 and applying the  
mastering effects to the L/R stereo mix, etc.  
The output levels from the [STEREO OUT (L,  
R)] connectors can be controlled by the  
[MASTER] fader.  
After rehearsing mixdown and adjusting the  
recording level, locate the MR-8HD/CD to the  
beginning of the song.  
5)  
6)  
Start the master recorder recording and then start  
the MR-8HD/CD playing back.  
After finishing recording, stop both recorders.  
Adjust the levels appropriately so that the  
highest segments of L and R meters do not light.  
<Tip>: By sliding up or down the MR-8HD/  
CD [MASTER] fader gradually, you can fade  
in or fade out recording.  
See "Using effects" on page 57 for details about  
the delay/reverb and mastering effects.  
You can also mix sound sources connected to  
[INPUT A] through [INPUT D] during mixdown.  
See page 73 for details.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Basic operations)  
Mixdown to a digital recorder  
The following describes how to make mixdown recording to an external digital recorder.  
Digital master recorder  
INPUT  
A
SEL  
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
GTR DIST  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AC-IN  
USB  
USB HOST  
MIDI OUT  
FOOT SW  
MR-8HD/CD  
[DIGITAL OUT]  
Optical cable  
1)  
Connect the [DIGITAL OUT] connector of the  
3)  
While playing back the MR-8HD/CD, rehearse  
MR-8HD/CD to the digital input connector of a  
digital master recorder using an optical cable.  
mixing down the recorded sounds by adjusting  
the level and panning of each track, applying  
effects to tracks 1 through 4 and applying the  
mastering effects to the L/R stereo mix, etc.  
See "Using effects" on page 57 for details about  
the delay/reverb and mastering effects.  
You can also mix sound sources connected to  
[INPUT A] through [INPUT D] during mixdown.  
See page 72 for details.  
<Note>:The [DIGITAL OUT] connector of the  
MR-8HD/CD is the Toslink optical type.  
If your digital recorder provides only the  
coaxial type connector, use the Fostex COP-  
1/96 kHz coaxial-optical converter.  
Contact Fostex or our dealer for details  
about the Model COP-1/96 kHz.  
4)  
Use the [MASTER] fader of the MR-8HD/CD to  
adjust the output level.  
Adjust the level appropriately so that the level  
meter of the master recorder shows "0" when  
the MR-8HD/CD outputs the biggest signal.  
If the level meter exceeds "0", the sound may  
be distorted.  
5)  
6)  
Start the master recorder recording and then start  
the MR-8HD/CD playing back.  
Model COP-1/96kHz  
<Tip>: By sliding up or down the MR-8HD/  
CD [MASTER] fader gradually, you can fade  
in or fade out recording.  
2)  
Set the master recorder to accept the digital  
input.  
Make sure that the recorder accepts the digital  
signal output from the MR-8HD/CD, which is  
44.1-kHz, 16-bit, S/P DIF signal.  
After finishing recording, stop both recorders.  
Generally, a digital recorder cannot adjust the  
digital input level.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Advanced playback and locate functions)  
Advanced playback and locate functions  
This chapter describes advanced playback functions including cueing,  
partial playback (between points A and B), special play modes, as well as  
the locate function.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Advanced playback and locate functions)  
3 x cueing  
By holding down the [F FWD] or [REWIND] key during playback, the recorder enters cueing mode  
and you can monitor playback at 3 x speed. It may be useful for searching a specific position.  
By holding down the [F FWD] key during play  
back, the recorder starts cueing forwards at 3 x  
speed.  
[REWIND] key  
[F FWD] key  
During forward cueing, ">>" is shown on the  
display.  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F FWD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
By holding down the [REWIND] key during play  
back, the recorder starts cueing backwards at 3  
x speed.  
During backward cueing, "<<" is shown on the  
display.  
Playback between LOCATE A and B points  
When the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points are set, you can playback between these points once.  
This function is always available regardless of the play mode setting (see "Play mode" on next  
page). This function allows you to check the editing part (between LOCATE A and B points) for  
copy/paste, erase, etc. See "Part editing" described later.  
While the recorder is stopped, press the [PLAY]  
key while holding down the [STOP] key.  
The MR-8HD/CD plays back audio data  
between the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points  
once, then stops.  
[STOP] key  
[PLAY] key  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F FWD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
LOCATE A point  
LOCATE B point  
Playback  
<Note>: Note that this function is available only  
when the LOCATE A and B points are set.  
See page 49 for details about how to set the LO-  
CATE A and B points.  
While the recorder is playing back between the  
LOCATE A and B points, the display shows the  
icon as below.  
<Note>: If you carry out the operation above when  
the LOCATE A point is set ahead of the LOCATE B  
point (i.e. LOCATE A > LOCATE B), the MR-8HD/  
CD plays back audio data from the LOCATE A  
point to the REC END points once, then stops.  
During playback, you can monitor playback  
audio of the desired track(s) by raising the ap-  
propriate track fader(s), the [MASTER] fader  
and the [PHONES] control.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Advanced playback and locate functions)  
Play mode  
The MR-8HD/CD offers special play modes including the auto play, auto return and loop play-  
back modes in addition to the normal playback mode.  
Selecting a play mode  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
MIN  
MAX LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
WAV FILE  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
POWERFUL  
NATURAL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
While the recorder is stopped,  
you can choose the desired play  
mode by pressing the [PLAY  
MODE] key as many times as  
needed.  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
R
L
L
PLAY MODE  
STU7  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A
/
IN  
B
/
OUT  
STORE  
UNDO/REDO  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
While the recorder is stopped, each time you press the [PLAY MODE] key, the play  
mode switches among "Off", "Auto Play", "Auto return" and "Loop".  
The current mode is shown on the screen as follows (when "Off" is selected, there is  
no indication).  
<Play mode "off">  
<Auto play mode>  
Lighting  
Lighting  
Lighting  
<Auto return mode>  
<Loop mode>  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Advanced playback and locate functions)  
Auto play mode  
In the Auto play mode, when locating to the ABS ZERO, REC END, LOCATE A or LOCATE B point,  
the recorder automatically starts playback from the point. The following shows the auto play  
function after locating to the LOCATE A point (see page 48 for the locate function).  
The point where you  
execute the locate function  
The point where you  
execute the locate function  
LOCATE A point  
Locate  
Locate  
Playback  
When locating to the LOCATE A point,  
the recorder automatically starts  
playback immediately.  
Auto return mode  
The auto return mode is active when the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points are set.  
In the auto return mode, when reaching at the LOCATE B point during playback, the recorder  
automatically locates to the LOCATE A point and stops.  
LOCATE A point  
LOCATE B point  
playback  
When reaching at the LOCATE B point during playback,  
the recorder automatically locates to the LOCATE A  
point and stops.  
Loop mode  
As with the auto return mode, the loop mode is active when the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points  
are set. In the loop mode, when reaching at the LOCATE B point during playback, the recorder  
automatically locates to the LOCATE A point and starts playback. The recorder repeats this  
behavior until you stop the recorder.  
You may find it very convenience to use the loop function together with the auto punch in/out  
function (see the next page).  
LOCATE B point  
LOCATE A point  
Playback  
When locating to the LOCATE A point, the recorder  
automatically starts playback.  
When reaching at the LOCATE B point during  
playback, the recorder automatically locates to  
the LOCATE A point.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Advanced playback and locate functions)  
Loop function in auto punch in/out mode  
When the loop mode is active (while the auto punch in/out mode is inactive), the LOCATE  
A and LOCATE B points are used as the loop start and end points. When the auto punch in/  
out mode is active (while the loop mode is inactive), the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points  
are used as the punch-in and punch-out points.  
When both the auto punch in/out and loop modes are active, the LOCATE A and LOCATE  
B points are used as the punch-in and punch-out points, while the loop function starts at  
"the LOCATE A point minus the pre-roll time" and ends at "the LOCATE B point plus the  
post-roll time", as shown below. The pre-roll time is initially set to four seconds, while the  
post-roll time is set to one second.  
<Note>: If you set the LOCATE A point to the beginning of a song (ABS ZERO) or set the  
LOCATE B point to the recording end point (REC END) of a song, the pre-roll or post-roll  
time is ignored.  
LOCATE A point  
LOCATE B point  
4 sec.  
1 sec.  
LOOP END point  
LOOP START point  
Using the loop function in the auto punch in/out mode reduces the number of key presses,  
allowing you to concentrate on playing.  
LOCATE A point  
(Punch in point)  
LOCATE B point  
(Punch out point)  
LOOP END point  
LOOP START point  
You can change the pre-roll and post-roll time within the range between 0.1 and 10.0  
seconds (in 0.1 second steps) in the menu mode (see page 126).  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Advanced playback and locate functions)  
Locate function  
The following describes the locate functions, which allow you to immediately skip to a specified  
point in a song.  
Time locate  
Regardless of the current recorder position, you can locate to the beginning (ABS ZERO) of the  
song or the recording end (REC END) of the song.  
Locating to the beginning (ABS ZERO) of a song  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[REWIND] key while holding down the [STOP] key.  
INPUT  
A
SELECT  
INPUT  
BAL  
A
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
The MR-8HD/CD immediately locates to the  
beginning of the song (ABS ZERO) and stops.  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
TRIM  
MIN  
MAX LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
REC END  
CONTRAST  
ABS ZERO  
The current position  
/
INPUT A  
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
WAV FILE  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
POWERFUL  
NATURAL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
R
L
L
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A
/
IN  
B
/
OUT  
STORE  
+-_0  
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
Locate  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
LOCATE REC END  
OCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
[STOP] key + [REWIND] key  
Locating to the recording end point (REC END) of a song  
While the recorder is stopped, press the [F FWD]  
key while holding down the [STOP] key.  
INPUT  
A
SELECT  
INPUT  
BAL  
A
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
The MR-8HD/CD immediately locates to the  
recording end of the song (REC END) and stops.  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
TRIM  
MIN  
MAX LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
The current position  
CONTRAST  
REC END  
ABS ZERO  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
WAV FILE  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
POWERFUL  
NATURAL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
R
L
L
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A
/
IN  
B
/
OUT  
STORE  
+-_0  
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
Locate  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
OCATE REC END  
OCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
[STOP] key + [F FWD] key  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Advanced playback and locate functions)  
Locating to the LOCATE A or LOCATE B point  
You can set the desired point of a song as the LOCATE A or LOCATE B point.  
The LOCATE A and B points can be used not only for locating, but also for auto punch in/out,  
play modes and part editing, etc.  
Setting the LOCATE A or LOCATE B point  
You can set the LOCATE A or LOCATE B point while the recorder is running or stops at the  
desired point, regardless of time base setting.  
<Note>: You cannot set the LOCATE A or B point for a protected song. If you are going to do so,  
the warning message ("This song is protected!") is shown. To set the LOCATE A or B point for a  
protected song, release the protection first (see page 101).  
<Note>: The LOCATE A point must be earlier than the LOCATE B point. If not, you cannot carry  
out the auto punch in/out or loop function correctly.  
<Tip>: While the time base is set to the bar/beat mode, if you set the "Beat resolution" menu item  
in the menu mode to "On", you can store the LOCATE A or B point in beat resolution. In other  
words, the clock digit of the Bar/Beat/Clk value is automatically rounded down or up, so that  
the clock digit is always "000".  
See page 127 for details about how to make the beat resolution active or inactive.  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
[STORE] key + [LOCATE A/IN] key  
[STORE] key + [LOCATE B/OUT] key  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A
/
N  
STOE  
+-
B
/
OUT  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
Y
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
To set the LOCATE A point:  
When the recorder is playing back (or stopped), press the [LOCATE A/IN] key at the desired point  
while holding down the [STORE] key.  
The display briefly shows "Store LOCATE A", and the point when pressing the [LOCATE A/IN]  
key is stored as the LOCATE A point.  
To set the LOCATE B point:  
When the recorder is playing back (or stopped), press the [LOCATE B/OUT] key at the desired  
point while holding down the [STORE] key.  
The display briefly shows "Store LOCATE B", and the point when pressing the [LOCATE B/OUT]  
key is stored as the LOCATE B point.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Advanced playback and locate functions)  
Locating  
While the recorder is stopped, press the [LOCATE A/IN] (or [LOCATE B/OUT]) key.  
The recorder instantly locates to the appropriate point.  
• When the current recorder position is between the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points:  
LOCATE A point  
The current position  
LOCATE B point  
Locate  
Locate  
• When the current recorder position is before the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points:  
The current position  
LOCATE A point  
LOCATE B point  
Locate  
Locate  
• When the current recorder position is after the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points:  
LOCATE A point  
LOCATE B point  
The current position  
Locate  
Locate  
<Tip>: By selecting the play mode to "Auto play", the recorder automatically starts  
playback after locating the LOCATE A or LOCATE B point.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Punch in/out)  
Punch in/out  
Using the punch in/out function of the MR-8HD/CD, you can overwrite  
the desired part of the recorded track. "Punch in" means switching from  
playback to recording, while "punch out" means switching from record-  
ing to playback. The MR-8HD/CD offers three methods for making punch  
in/out recording.  
1)  
2)  
3)  
Manual punch in/out using the top panel keys  
Punch in/out using a footswitch  
Auto punch in/out at the specified in/out points  
The following description assumes that the song you are going to make  
punch in/out recording to is loaded and the preparations for recording  
is completed.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Punch in/out)  
Punch in/out using the keys on the top panel  
You can make punch in/out manually by using the [RECORD] and [PLAY] keys on the MR-8HD/  
CD top panel.  
<Note>: The punch in/out operation by yourself using the keys on the top panel sometimes  
prevents you from concentrating on playing. In such a case, ask someone to operate the MR-  
8HD/CD, or use either of the other two punch in/out methods described later.  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A
/
IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
1
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
3
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
2,4  
Press the [RECORD] key  
while holding down the [PLAY] key.  
(Punch in)  
Press only the [PLAY] key.  
(Punch out)  
Playback  
Recording  
Playback  
1)  
2)  
Press the [REC SELECT] key for the track you  
are going to make punch in/out recording.  
The track is record-armed.  
<Important note>  
You cannot punch in by only pressing the  
[RECORD] key. You need to hold down the  
[PLAY] key when pressing the [RECORD] key.  
Locate the recorder to the point before the punch-  
in point and press the [PLAY] key to start  
playback.  
It may be a good idea to play the instrument  
along with the playback sound, so that you can  
get the tempo and feel.  
4)  
When the recorder reaches at the point you want  
to punch out, press only the [PLAY] key.  
The recorder status switches from recording  
to playback.  
5)  
6)  
Press the [STOP] key to stop the recorder.  
3)  
When the recorder reaches at the point you want  
to punch in, press the [RECORD] key while holding  
down the [PLAY] key (see <Important note> below>).  
The armed track is punched in (i.e. starts  
recording).  
Rewind the recorder and play back the part you  
performed the punch in/out recording to check  
the result.  
If you are not satisfied with the result, use the  
undo function to cancel the punch in/out  
recording and try again.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Punch in/out)  
Punch in/out using the footswitch  
You can make hands-free punch in/out recording using an unlatched-type footswitch.  
INPUT A SEL  
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
GTR DIST  
[FOOT SW] jack  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AC-IN  
USB  
USB HOST  
MIDI OUT  
FOOT SW  
Unlatched-type footswitch  
Press the footswitch.  
(Punch in)  
Press the footswitch.  
(Punch out)  
Playback  
Recording  
Playback  
1)  
2)  
Connect the footswitch to the [FOOT SW] jack  
on the MR-8HD/CD rear panel.  
<Note>: You cannot perform another punch  
in/out recording successively.  
To perform punch in/out recording in an-  
other part, stop the recorder and perform  
the steps above again.  
Press the [REC SELECT] key for the track you  
are going to make punch in/out recording.  
The track is record-armed.  
3)  
Locate the recorder to the point before the punch-  
in point, and press the [PLAY] key to start play  
back.  
It may be a good idea to play the instrument  
along with the playback sound, so that you can  
get the tempo and feel.  
6)  
7)  
Press the [STOP] key to stop the recorder.  
Rewind the recorder and play back the part you  
performed the punch in/out recording to check  
the result.  
If you are not satisfied with the result, use the  
undo function to cancel the punch in/out  
recording and try again.  
4)  
5)  
When the recorder reaches at the point you want  
to punch in, press the footswitch.  
The armed track is punched in (i.e. starts  
recording).  
When the recorder reaches at the point you want  
to punch out, press the footswitch again.  
The recorder status switches from recording  
to playback.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Punch in/out)  
Auto punch in/out  
By setting the punch-in and punch-out points in advance, the recorder automatically makes  
punch in/out recording for you. You can rehearse punch in/out recording as many times you  
like.  
Setting the punch-in and punch-out points  
You can set the punch-in and punch-out points on-the-fly while playing back the recorder (as  
well as you can set them while the recorder is stopped at the desired position).  
Punch-in point  
Punch-out point  
Part replaced with a new recording  
<Note>: If you are not satisfied with the  
punch-in or punch-out point you set, sim-  
ply redo the operation above. The new time  
data overwrites the previous one.  
<Note>: You cannot make punch-in/out recording  
on a song which is protected. Release the song pro-  
tection before making punch-in/out recording.  
1)  
Start playback from the beginning of the song  
(or from a point before the point where you want  
to make punching in) by pressing the [PLAY] key.  
4)  
Stop the recorder after setting the punch-in and  
punch-out points, and rewind the recorder to the  
beginning of the song (or to a point before the  
point where you want to make punching in).  
2)  
When the recorder reaches at the point where  
you want to make punching in, press the  
[LOCATE A/IN] key while holding down the  
[STORE] key.  
The display briefly shows "Store LOCATE A" and  
the time data when you press the  
<Hint>: To rewind the recorder to the be-  
ginning of the song after setting the  
punch-out point, press the [REWIND] key  
while holding down the [STOP] key.  
[LOCATE A/IN] key is set as the punch-in point.  
To locate before the punch-in point, carry  
out the following.  
LOCATE  
AUTO PUNCH  
PQR6  
PLAY MODE  
STU7  
A / IN  
B / OUT  
YZ9  
STORE  
+
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
V8  
(1)  
(2)  
While the recorder is stopped, press  
the [LOCATE A/IN] key.  
The recorder immediately locates to  
the punch-in point and stops.  
3)  
When the recorder reaches at the point where  
you want to make punching out, press the  
[LOCATE B/OUT] key while holding down the  
[STORE] key.  
Press the [REWIND] key to move back  
the recorder and press the [STOP] key  
at the desired point.  
The display briefly shows "Store LOCATE B" and  
the time data when you press the  
[LOCATE B/OUT] key is set as the punch-out  
point.  
<Hint>: The punch-in and punch-out  
points you set also can be used for the  
locate function, playback by the play  
mode and part editing (see pages 45 and  
111).  
LOCATE  
AUTO PUNCH  
PLAY MODE  
A / IN  
B / OUT  
STORE  
UNDO/REDO  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
+
DELETE  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Punch in/out)  
Rehearsal for auto punch in/out  
After setting the punch-in and punch-out points appropriately, you can rehearse the auto punch  
in/out for checking the punch-in and -out points or practicing punch-in and -out timing.  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
MIN  
MAX LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
WAV FILE  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
POWERFUL  
NATURAL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
<How to make auto punch in/out mode active>  
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
R
L
L
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A
/
IN  
B
/
OUT  
STORE  
UNDO/REDO  
Pressing the [AUTO PUNCH] key  
AUTO PUNCH  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
switches the auto punch in/out mode  
on or off.  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
PQR6  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
Each press of the [AUTO PUNCH] key  
turns on or off the indicator.  
Punch-in point  
Punch-out point  
Playback  
Playback  
Input monitor  
1)  
Locate the recorder to the point before the punch-  
in point (or the beginning of the song).  
4)  
Press the [PLAY] key.  
The recorder starts punch in/out rehearsal.  
The "  
" icon on the display changes  
" icon.  
<Tip>: You can immediately locate to the  
punch-in point by pressing the  
to the "  
In the rehearsal mode, the recorder automati-  
cally switches the monitor of the armed track  
from "repro" to "input" at the punch-in point,  
but actual recording is not made (the [RECORD]  
[LOCATE A/IN] key. Therefore, by press-  
ing the [LOCATE A/IN] key, followed by  
the [REWIND] key then the [STOP] key,  
you can easily locate to the point before  
the punch-in point.  
key flashes while "  
display.  
" is shown on the  
By repeating the operation above, you can prac-  
tice auto in/out operation as many times as  
you like.  
2)  
3)  
Press the [REC SELECT] key of the track you are  
going to make punch in/out operation to arm the  
track.  
5)  
After the punch-out point is passed, locate the  
recorder back to the beginning position.  
Press the [AUTO PUNCH] key to make the auto  
punch mode active.  
The "  
screen.  
" icon is now shown on the  
<Note>: By using the loop function when  
rehearsing the auto punch in/out operation,  
you can concentrate on playing without the  
need of troublesome operation of the MR-  
8HD/CD. See page 45 for details about the  
loop function.  
Lighting  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Punch in/out)  
Actual auto punch in/out  
After rehearsing the auto punch-in/out operation, it's time for executing actual auto punch in/  
out operation.  
Punch in point  
Punch out point  
Playback  
Recording  
Playback  
1)  
2)  
Locate the recorder to the point before the punch-  
in point.  
<Note>: In addition to the punch in/out func-  
tion, the MR-8HD/CD allows you to edit the  
recorded material using the following editing  
functions.  
Make sure that "AUTO PUNCH" is shown on the  
screen (i.e. the auto punch mode is active).  
If it is not shown, press the [AUTO PUNCH] key.  
• Deleting the whole data on the desired  
track (using the "EraseTrack" menu item).  
See page 104.  
3)  
Press the [RECORD] key while holding down the  
[PLAY] key.  
• Copying all data on a track and pasting it  
to another track (using the "Copy Paste  
Track" menu item). See page 105.  
The recorder starts executing actual punch in/  
out operation. The "  
" icon on the  
" icon.  
display changes to the "  
• Moving the desired track data to the other  
track(s) (using the "Move Track" menu  
item). See page 107.  
Unlike the rehearsal, the recorder  
automatically starts recording when it reaches  
the punch-in point, then automatically stops  
recording and exits the auto punch mode at  
the punch-out point.  
• Exchanging all track data between tracks  
(using the "ChangeTrack" menu item). See  
page 108.  
<Note>: You can cancel the auto punch in/  
out recording you made by pressing the  
[UNDO/REDO] key.  
• Deleting the desired part (using the "Erase  
Part" menu item). See page 113.  
• Pasting the desired part(s) to the other  
track(s) (using the "Copy Paste Part" menu  
item or the "Copy Part" and "Paste Part"  
menu items). See pages 114 and 116.  
• Moving the desired part(s) to the other  
track(s) (using the "Move Part" menu item).  
See page 119.  
• Exchanging parts between tracks (using the  
"Change Part" menu item). See page 121.  
<About "part">  
A "part" is defined as audio data between  
the "LOCATE A" and "LOCATE B" points.  
Therefore, you have to set the "LOCATE  
A" and "LOCATE B" points when editing a  
"part".  
The punch-in and punch-out points set  
for the auto punch in/out function also  
can be used as the "LOCATE A" and "LO-  
CATE B" points.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Using effects)  
Using effects  
The MR-8HD/CD provides the insert effects for recording (microphone  
and amplifier simulation effects), the delay/reverb effects for track bounce  
or mixdown (for tracks 1 through 4 only), and the mastering effects for  
L/R mix. You can also use an external effect device connected to the  
[INSERT] connector.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Using effects)  
Using the insert effects  
The [INPUT A] channel of the MR-8HD/CD provides two types of insert effects: microphone and  
amplifier simulation effects. These effects can be used during recording.  
These effects simulate popular microphones and guitar amplifiers. If you use the microphone  
simulation effect when you record an acoustic guitar through your microphone, you can make  
recording as if you are using a famous microphone. If you use the guitar amplifier simulation  
effect when you record an electric guitar directly connected to the MR-8HD/CD, you can make  
recording as if you are using a famous guitar amplifier.  
Note that you cannot get exactly the same sound as the original microphone/guitar amplifier by  
using simulation effects.  
Mic simulation effects  
You can use mic simulation effects when the [INPUT A SELECT] switch on the rear panel is set to  
"MIC/LINE".  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
TUBE  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
INPUT A SEL  
Set to the "MIC/LINE" position  
BRIT TACK  
60'S OMBO  
SIMULATION  
AMP  
US MTAL  
GTR CLEAN  
GTR DIST  
MIC/LINE  
“TUBE”  
“DYNAMIC” “CONDENSER”  
By pressing the appropriate key, you can  
choose from among three mic simulation ef-  
fects: DYNAMIC, CONDENSER and TUBE (the  
indicator of the key lights up).  
• Details of each mic simulation effect  
Simulates the sound of a popular dy-  
namic microphone.  
DYNAMIC  
Simulates the sound of a popular con-  
denser microphone for professional use.  
CONDENSER  
Simulates the sound of a popular tube  
microphone for professional use.  
TUBE  
Amp simulation effects  
You can use mic simulation effects when the [INPUT A SELECT] switch on the rear panel is set to  
"GTR DIST" or "GTR CLEAN". Only when the switch is set to "GTR DIST", you can also use the  
distortion (adjusted by the [DISTORTION] control), as well as the insert effects.  
“60”s COMBO”  
“BRIT STACK” “US METAL”  
When the switch is set to  
"GTR DIST".  
INPUT A SEL  
DYNMIC  
CONDENSER  
US METAL  
TUBE  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
GTR CLEAN  
GTR DIST  
MIC/LINE  
BRIT STACK  
60'S COMBO  
SIMULATION  
AMP  
When the switch is set to  
"GTR CLEAN".  
• Amp simulation effects details  
INPUT A SEL  
Simulates a popular British 800-series  
tube guitar amp head.  
GTR CLEAN  
GTR DIST  
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
MIC/LINE  
Simulates a popular US high gain metal  
guitar amplifier.  
You can choose from three guitar amp simu-  
lation effects: BRIT STACK, US METAL and 60's  
COMBO (the selected key lights up).  
Simulates a popular tube combo guitar  
amplifier.  
60’s COMBO  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Using effects)  
Applying external effects  
During recording, you can apply external effects to a sound source connected to an input con-  
nector in the [INPUT A] channel.  
The [INPUT A] channel has the [INSERT] connector (phone jack). You can connects an external  
effect unit (typically, a compressor/limiter) to this connector using a Y-cable, as shown below.  
EFFECTOR (COMP/LIMITER) etc.  
Input  
Output  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
Sound source  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A / IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
4
1
2
3
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
The source (dry) signal fed to the [INPUT A] channel is sent to the external effect  
unit connected to the [INSERT] connector and the wet (effect) signal returns to  
the [INPUT A] channel. Thus, you can apply effects to the "INPUT A" signal by  
connecting an external effect unit.  
EFFECTOR  
Input  
Output  
Dry (original) sound  
Sound  
source  
INPUT A  
Wet (effect) sound  
See the manual of your effect unit for details about how to use it.  
A Y-cable is not supplied with the MR-8HD/CD, therefore, purchase an appro-  
priate Y-cable available in the market.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Using effects)  
Using the reverb or delay  
The MR-8HD/CD has the original built-in reverb/delay processor featuring the newly-developed  
algorithm. You can apply the reverb or delay to playback signals of tracks 1 through 4 during  
mixdown and track bouncing.  
Selecting an effect type  
Selecting a delay type  
You can select an effect type from among three  
reverb options (ROOM, HALL and PLATE) and  
a delay (DELAY) by using the keys in the [EF-  
FECT] section shown below.  
When you use the delay effect, you can select  
a delay type.  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially.  
EFFECT  
REVERB / DELAY TIME  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
HALL  
ROOM  
PLATE  
PLATE  
DELAY  
DELAY  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"System ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the system menu  
screen, where " Back" is highlighted.  
Details of each effect type  
Simulates reverberation in a medium-sized  
room. When you select "ROOM", you can  
adjust the reverb time using the [REVERB/  
DELAY TIME] control.  
ROOM  
Simulates reverberation in a hall with moder-  
ate early reflection.  
When you select "HALL", you can adjust the  
reverb time using the [REVERB/DELAY  
TIME] control.  
HALL  
Simulates a plate reverb with a wide fre-  
quency range.  
When you select "PLATE", you can adjust the  
reverb time using the [REVERB/DELAY  
TIME] control.  
PLATE  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"DelayType" and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The current delay type starts flashing and you  
can now select from among three options  
shown below ("L-R" is initially selected).  
Adds delay effects. You can select the de-  
sired delay types using the "Delay Type" item  
of the System menu in the menu mode (you  
can easily access to the "Delay Type" setting  
screen by a long press of the [DELAY] key).  
DELAY  
Three delay types are available: Mono, L-R  
and Diff. See below for details.  
When you select "ROOM", you can adjust  
the delay time using the [REVERB/DELAY  
TIME] control.  
Flashing  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Using effects)  
You can choose from among the following three  
delay types.  
Adjusting the effect send levels  
L - R  
Mono  
Diff  
L-R delay (default)  
Mono delay  
To apply the effect (reverb or delay) to tracks  
1 through 4, adjust the [EFFECT SEND] con-  
trol for each track to adjust the level of the  
track signal sent to the effect processor.  
Diffusion delay  
In the example as illustrated below, tracks 1  
and 2 signals are sent to the effect processor.  
4)  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
desired delay type and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The selected delay type is set, while the  
display returns to the previous screen.  
[EFFECT SEND] control  
Press the [STOP] key to quit the menu mode.  
EFFECT SEND  
0
10  
0
10  
0
10  
0
10  
Adjusting the delay/reverb time  
As shown in the signal flowchart below, a track  
(playback) signal after the track fader is fed  
to the [EFFECT SEND] control and adjusted,  
then fed to the effect processor input.  
You can adjust the reverb time or delay time  
using the [REVERB/DELAY TIME] control, de-  
pending on the selected effect type.  
EFFECT  
The effect processor's stereo output signals  
(wet signals) and stereo (L/R) signals (dry sig-  
nals) are merged together and then output  
from the [STEREO OUT L, R] jacks.  
REVERB / DELAY TIME  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
[REVERB / DELAY TIME] control  
As you can see in the flowchart below, the  
signal sent to the effect processor is affected  
by the track fader (i.e. a track fader must be  
raised to send track signal to the effect pro-  
cessor). The signal which passes through a  
fader is generally called a "post fader signal".  
PLATE  
DELAY  
Adjusts the reverb time within the range between  
1.0 s and 6.0 s (center position: 3.0 s)  
HALL  
ROOM  
PLATE  
DELAY  
Adjusts the reverb time within the range between  
0.1 s and 2.0 s (center position: 1.0 s)  
Adjusts the reverb time within the range between  
0.5 s and 4.0 s (center position: 2.0 s)  
Adjusts the delay time within the range between  
100 ms to 1000 ms (center position: 300 ms)  
<Signal flow from a track to the effect processor (onlyTrack 1~ 4)>  
STEREO BUSS  
1
Playback  
Dry sound  
Track 1  
PAN  
L
R
R
L
EFFECT SEND  
10  
0
Adjusts the track  
playback level  
Delay  
or  
Reverb  
Adjusts the send level to the  
effect processor  
Wet sound  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Using effects)  
Using the mastering effects  
The MR-8HD/CD provides the dedicated mastering effects for the L/R stereo buss.  
You can use the mastering effects when bouncing more than one track to stereo tracks or when  
mixing down tracks 1 through 8 to stereo and sent to an external master recorder for recording.  
<Bouncing tracks 1 through 6 to track 7/8>  
<Bouncing tracks 1 through 4 to track 5/6>  
Mastering effects  
Reverb  
or Delay  
Mastering effects  
Reverb  
or Delay  
Playback  
Trk 1  
Trk 2  
Trk 3  
Playback  
Trk 1  
Trk 2  
Trk 3  
Playback  
Playback  
Playback  
Playback  
Playback  
Trk 4  
Playback  
Trk 4  
Playback  
Trk 5  
INPUT A ~ INPUT D  
Playback  
Trk 6  
Record  
Trk 5  
INPUT A ~ INPUT D  
bouncing  
Record  
Trk 6  
Record  
Trk 7  
bouncing  
Record  
Trk 8  
<Bouncing tracks 1 through 8 to the New song>  
Reverb  
or Delay  
<Mixing down tracks 1 through 8>  
Mastering effects  
Mastering effects  
Reverb  
or Delay  
Playback  
Trk 1  
Playback  
Trk 2  
Playback  
Playback  
Playback  
Trk 1  
Trk 2  
Trk 3  
Trk 4  
Trk 5  
Trk 3  
Playback  
Trk 4  
[STEREO OUT L, R]  
STEREO OUT (L, R)  
Playback  
Playback  
Playback  
Trk 5  
Trk 6  
Playback  
D/A  
Playback  
Playback  
Playback  
Playback  
Playback  
Trk 6  
Trk 7  
Trk 8  
Trk 7  
Trk 8  
Playback  
[DIGITAL OUT]  
INPUT A ~ INPUT D  
INPUT A ~ INPUT D  
Record  
Record  
Trk 7  
Trk 8  
New Song  
See "Track bounce" on page 63 for details about track  
bounce which allows mixing multiple tracks to stereo.  
See "Mixdown" on page 41 for details about mixdown.  
bouncing  
Selecting the desired effect type  
Three mastering effect types are available. You  
can select the desired type using the [MAS-  
TERING] keys (POWERFUL, NATURAL and  
BRIGHT).  
Adds power to the sound. Good for rock.  
POWERFUL  
NATURAL  
Slightly adds power to the sound. Good for  
acoustic music.  
POWERFUL  
NATURAL  
BRIGHT  
Add brightness to the sound. Good for use  
when the mixed sound is dark.  
BRIGHT  
MASTERING  
J4  
M5  
<Note>: By activating the mastering effect, the out-  
put level raises. Therefore, be careful of the level  
change when monitoring via headphones or moni-  
tor speakers, as well as when adjusting the record-  
ing level of an external recorder.  
Each effect type has the following character.  
Select the appropriate type.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track bouncing)  
Track bouncing  
This chapter describes track bouncing which is an important func-  
tion in the recording process.  
The track bouncing mixes several tracks and records onto other  
two tracks. By using this function, you can record more sound  
materials to the MR-8HD/CD tracks.  
Three track bouncing modes are available:  
(1) Bouncing tracks 1 through 4 to tracks 5/6.  
(2) Bouncing tracks 1 through 6 to tracks 7/8  
(3) Bouncing tracks 1 through 8 to tracks 7/8 of a new song.  
In any mode, you can apply a reverb (or delay) to tracks 1 through  
4 when bouncing to two tracks in stereo. Furthermore, you can  
apply the mastering effect to the mixed signals.  
You can also execute track bouncing while mixing sound sources  
from inputs A through D.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track bouncing)  
Preliminary knowledge  
Before executing track bouncing, read "Track bouncing example" below and "Track bouncing signal  
flow" on the next page.  
Track bouncing example  
You can record more than eight materials using the track bouncing function as shown in the  
following example.  
<Step 1>  
<Step 2>  
<Step 3>  
Make recording to tracks 1 through 6.  
Bounce tracks 1 through 6 to tracks 7/8.  
Delete tracks 1 through 6.  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
Track 6  
Track 7  
Track 8  
Track 6  
Track 7  
Track 8  
Track 6  
Track 7  
Track 8  
<Step 4>  
<Step 5>  
<Step 6>  
Overdub new materials to tracks 1 Bounce tracks 1 through 4 to tracks 5/6.  
through 4.  
Delete tracks 1 through 4.  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
Track 6  
Track 7  
Track 8  
Track 6  
Track 7  
Track 8  
Track 6  
Track 7  
Track 8  
In this step, you can make track  
bouncing while listening to  
tracks 7/8 as well.  
<Step 7>  
Overdub new materials to tracks 1  
through 4.  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
Track 6  
Track 7  
Track 8  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track bouncing)  
Signal flow of track bouncing  
The following shows the signal flow for each of three track bouncing modes.  
• "1-4 > 5/6" mode (see page 66)  
In the "1-4 > 5/6" mode, tracks 1 through 4  
Reverb  
are played back, mixed down to stereo, and  
or  
Delay  
bounced to tracks 5/6.  
You can apply a reverb (or delay) to tracks  
Playback  
Trk 1  
1 through 4, as well as the mastering effect  
Playback  
Trk 2  
to the mixed signals.  
Playback  
Trk 3  
You can also mix signals from the [INPUT  
Playback  
Trk 4  
A] through [INPUT D] channels during track  
INPUT A ~ INPUT D  
bouncing.  
Track bouncing  
From headphones (or monitor speakers),  
you can hear the signals bounced to tracks  
5/6 (i.e. mixed signals) as well as playback  
signals of tracks 7/8.  
Record  
Trk 5  
STEREO OUT (L, R)  
Record  
Trk 6  
Playback  
Trk 7  
Playback  
Trk 8  
• "1-6 > 7/8" mode (see page 68)  
Reverb  
In the "1-6 > 7/8" mode, tracks 1 through 6  
or  
Delay  
are played back, mixed down to stereo, and  
bounced to tracks 7/8.  
Playback  
Trk 1  
In this mode, you can apply a reverb (or  
Playback  
Trk 2  
delay) to tracks 1 through 4, as well as the  
Playback  
Trk 3  
mastering effect to the mixed signals.  
Playback  
Trk 4  
You can also mix signals from the [INPUT  
A] through [INPUT D] channels during track  
Playback  
Trk 5  
Playback  
Trk 6  
bouncing.  
INPUT A ~ INPUT D  
From headphones (or monitor speakers),  
Track bouncing  
you can hear the signals bounced to tracks  
7/8 (i.e. mixed signals).  
Record  
Trk 7  
Trk 8  
STEREO OUT (L, R)  
Record  
• "1-8 > NEW SONG" mode (see page 70)  
In the "1-8 > NEW SONG" mode, tracks 1  
through 8 are played back, mixed down to  
stereo, and bounced to tracks 7/8 of a new  
song which is automatically created. So this  
bouncing mode allows you to internally  
record a stereo master without the need of  
an external master recorder.  
In this mode, you can apply a reverb (or  
delay) to tracks 1 through 4, as well as the  
mastering effect to the mixed signals.  
You can also mix signals from the [INPUT  
A] through [INPUT D] channels during track  
bouncing.  
Reverb  
or Delay  
Playback  
Trk 1  
Trk 2  
Trk 3  
Trk 4  
Playback  
Playback  
Playback  
STEREO OUT (L, R)  
Playback  
Playback  
Trk 5  
Trk 6  
Playback  
Playback  
Trk 7  
Trk 8  
INPUT A ~ INPUT D  
Record  
Record  
Trk 7  
Trk 8  
New Song  
From headphones (or monitor speakers),  
you can hear the signals bounced to tracks  
7/8 of the new song.  
Track bounce  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track bouncing)  
Bouncing tracks 1 through 4 to tracks 5/6  
You can bounce tracks 1 through 4 to tracks 5/6.  
Before executing track bouncing, you can rehearse track bouncing as many times as you like.  
Rehearsal of track bouncing  
Before executing track bouncing, you can rehearse it. While rehearsing track bouncing, you can  
control the playback level, panning and reverb (or delay) send setting of each source track, as well as  
apply the mastering effect to the mixed L/R signals. We recommend to make rehearsal thoroughly  
until you are satisfied with the sound. The following assumes that the song you are going to execute  
track bouncing is loaded.  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT B  
BAL  
INPUT C  
BAL  
INPUT D  
BAL  
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
4
4
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
1
4
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A / IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
4
3
5
2,4  
3)  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback from the  
beginning of the song.  
1)  
Use the [1-4 > 5/6, 1-6 > 7/8] key to select the  
"1-4 > 5/6" bounce mode.  
Selecting this bounce mode automatically arms  
tracks 5/6 and changes the monitoring mode  
for these tracks to input monitoring mode.  
The display looks like this:  
4)  
While playing back the song, adjust playback  
levels of tracks 1 through 4 using the track  
faders.  
You can also adjust panning for tracks 1  
through 4 and apply the reverb or delay to  
these tracks, as well as apply the mastering  
effect to the mixed sound.  
Lighting  
During rehearsal and actual track bouncing,  
the track faders and [MASTER] fader control  
the following signals.  
Lighting  
Flashing  
Faders  
Playback levels of tracks 1 through  
1 through 4 4 for bouncing.  
2)  
Raise the [5/6] fader and [MASTER] fader to the  
" position. Set all the other track faders down  
to the minimum position.  
Fader 5/6  
Monitor levels of tracks 5/6.  
"
Recording master level of tracks  
5/6.  
[MASTER]  
fader  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track bouncing)  
During rehearsal and actual track bouncing,  
level meters on the screen show the following  
signal levels.  
Meters  
1 through 4  
Playback levels of tracks 1 through  
4.  
Recording levels of tracks 5/6.  
Meters 5/6  
Monitor output levels of STEREO  
OUT (L, R).  
Meters  
L and R  
Checking the bounced signals on tracks 5/6  
You can check the bounced signals while the  
bounce mode is active.  
By raising the [PHONES VOL] control, you can  
hear the signals bounced to tracks 5/6.  
Use the [5/6] fader to control the monitor out-  
put levels, and use the [MASTER] fader to ad-  
just the recording levels of the bounced sig-  
nals appropriately while checking meters 5/6.  
1)  
Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the  
[STOP] key to locate the recorder to the  
beginning of the song.  
2)  
3)  
4)  
Make sure that the input monitoring mode is  
turned off.  
You can apply the delay/reverb to tracks 1  
through 4 and the mastering effects to the ste-  
reo L and R signals. See "Using effects" on page  
57 for details about the delay/reverb and mas-  
tering effects.  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback from the  
beginning of the song.  
Use the [5/6] fader to control the playback level  
of the bounced signals.  
By playing back the recorder while the bounce  
mode ("1-4 > 5/6") is active, only tracks 5/6  
can be monitored. In this condition, you  
cannot monitor playback signals of tracks 1  
through 4 even if you raise their faders.  
<Panning control>  
You can freely adjust panning for tracks  
1 through 4 using the PAN controls.  
For example, a guitar to left, a vocal to  
center, etc.  
5)  
After finishing rehearsal, press the [STOP] key  
to stop the recorder and locate it to the  
beginning of the song.  
Do not move the controls and faders after  
finishing rehearsal.  
If you want to redo track bouncing, use the  
undo function to go back to the condition  
before carrying out track bouncing, and try  
again.  
<Auto punch in/out of track bouncing>  
You can bounce only the desired part (between  
the IN and OUT points) using the auto punch in/  
out function (see page 74).  
Actual track bouncing  
After finishing rehearsal, let's carry out ac-  
tual track bouncing. Make sure that the re-  
corder stops at the beginning of the song.  
<Track bouncing while mixing signals from [INPUT  
A] through [INPUT D]>  
When you bounce tracks 1 through 4 to tracks  
5/6, you can also mix signals from [INPUT A]  
through [INPUT D] together (see page 72).  
1)  
Before carrying out actual track bouncing, make  
sure that the bounce mode is selected to  
"1-4 > 5/6".  
2)  
Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the  
[RECORD] key.  
Track bouncing starts with the effect/level  
settings made in the rehearsal mode. The mixed  
signals are recorded onto tracks 5/6.  
3)  
After track bouncing completes, press the [STOP]  
key to stop the recorder.  
Stopping the recorder automatically turns off  
the input monitoring mode of tracks 5/6, while  
the display changes to show the screen below,  
prompting you to play back tracks 5/6 for  
confirming the result.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track bouncing)  
Bouncing tracks 1 through 6 to tracks 7/8  
You can bounce tracks 1 through 6 to tracks 7/8.  
As described earlier in "Bouncing tracks 1 through 4 to tracks 5/6", you can rehearse track bouncing  
as many times as you like before executing actual track bouncing.  
<Using bounced track data>  
By converting bounced track data (in two mono WAV files) to a stereo WAV file, you can export  
it to a personal computer or create an original audio CD using the internal (or an external) CD-R/  
RW drive. See page 90 for details about how to export a file to a personal computer. See the  
supplementary manual "How to use the CD-R/RW drive" for details about burning an audio CD  
using the internal (or an external) CD-R/RW drive.  
Rehearsal of track bouncing  
Before executing track bouncing, you can rehearse it. While rehearsing track bouncing, you can  
control the playback level, panning and reverb (or delay) send setting of each source track, as well as  
apply the mastering effect to the mixed L/R signals. We recommend to make rehearsal thoroughly  
until you are satisfied with the sound. The following assumes that the song you are going to execute  
track bouncing is loaded.  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
WAV FILE  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
4
4
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
1
4
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A
/
IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
4
3
5
2,4  
1)  
Use the [1-4 > 5/6, 1-6 > 7/8] key to select the  
"1-6 > 7/8" bounce mode.  
2)  
Raise the [5/6] fader and [MASTER] fader to the  
" position. Set all the other track faders  
"
Selecting this bounce mode automatically arms  
tracks 7/8 and changes the monitoring mode  
for these tracks to input monitoring mode.  
The display looks like this:  
down to the minimum position.  
3)  
4)  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback from the  
beginning of the song.  
While playing back the song, adjust playback levels  
of tracks 1 through 6 using the track faders.  
You can also adjust panning for tracks 1  
through 4 and apply the reverb or delay to  
these tracks, as well as apply the mastering  
effect to the mixed sound.  
Lighting  
Lighting  
During rehearsal and actual track bouncing,  
the track faders and [MASTER] fader control  
the following signals.  
Flashing  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track bouncing)  
3)  
After track bouncing completes, press the [STOP]  
key to stop the recorder.  
Faders  
1 through 4 for bouncing.  
Playback levels of tracks 1 through 4  
Stopping the recorder automatically turns off  
the input monitoring mode of tracks 7/8, while  
the display changes to show the screen below,  
prompting you to play back tracks 7/8 for  
confirming the result.  
Playback levels of tracks 5/6 for bounc-  
ing.  
Fader 5/6  
Fader 7/8  
Monitor levels of tracks 7/8.  
[MASTER]  
fader  
Recording master level of tracks 7/8.  
During rehearsal and actual track bouncing,  
the level meters on the screen show the fol-  
lowing signal levels.  
Meters  
Playback levels of tracks 1 through 4.  
1 through 4  
Checking the bounced signals on tracks 7/8  
You can check the bounced signals while the  
bounce mode is active.  
Meters 5/6 Recording levels of tracks 5/6.  
Meters 7/8 Recording levels of tracks 7/8.  
1)  
Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the  
[STOP] key to locate the recorder to the  
beginning of the song.  
Meters L  
and R  
Monitor output levels of STEREO OUT  
(L, R).  
2)  
3)  
4)  
Make sure that the input monitoring mode is  
turned off.  
By raising the [PHONES VOL] control, you can  
hear the signals bounced to tracks 7/8.  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback from the  
beginning of the song.  
Use the [7/8] fader to control the monitor out-  
put levels, and use the [MASTER] fader to ad-  
just the recording levels of the bounced sig-  
nals appropriately while checking meters 7/8.  
Use the [7/8] fader to control the playback level  
of the bounced signals.  
By playing back the recorder while the bounce  
mode ("1-6 > 7/8") is active, only tracks 7/8  
can be monitored. In this condition, you can  
not monitor playback signals of tracks 1  
through 6 even if you raise their faders.  
You can apply the delay/reverb to tracks 1  
through 4 and the mastering effects to the ste-  
reo L and R signals. See "Using effects" on page  
57 for details about the delay/reverb and mas-  
tering effects.  
If you want to redo track bouncing, use the  
undo function to go back to the condition  
before carrying out track bouncing, and try  
again.  
<Panning control>  
You can freely adjust panning for tracks 1  
through 4 using the PAN controls. For ex-  
ample, a guitar to left, a vocal to center, etc.  
<Auto punch in/out of track bouncing>  
You can bounce only the desired part (between  
the IN and OUT points) using the auto punch in/  
out function (see page 74).  
5)  
After finishing rehearsal, press the [STOP] key  
to stop the recorder and locate it to the  
beginning of the song.  
Do not move the controls and faders after  
finishing rehearsal.  
<Track bouncing while mixing signals from [INPUT  
A] through [INPUT D]>  
When you bounce tracks 1 through 6 to tracks  
7/8, you can also mix signals from [INPUT A]  
through [INPUT D] together (see page 72).  
Actual track bouncing  
After finishing rehearsal, let's carry out ac-  
tual track bouncing. Make sure that the re-  
corder stops at the beginning of the song.  
<Exporting bounced data to a PC>  
Song data bounced to tracks 7/8 can be ex-  
ported to a PC. You can use the exported data  
as a source when burning an original audio CD  
using a CD-R/RW drive, or use it with a  
computer's music software. Before exporting  
song data on tracks 7/8 to a PC, you must con-  
vert the two mono WAV files on tracks 7/8 to a  
stereo WAV file (see page 90).  
1)  
2)  
Before carrying out actual track bouncing, make  
sure that the bounce mode is selected to "1-6>7/8".  
Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the  
[RECORD] key.  
Track bouncing starts with the effect/level  
settings made in the rehearsal mode. The mixed  
signals are recorded onto tracks 7/8.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track bouncing)  
Bouncing tracks 1 through 8 to a new song  
You can bounce tracks 1 through 8 to tracks 7/8 of a new song. A new song is automatically  
created when executing track bouncing (<Note>: In the “1-8 > NEW SONG” mode, you cannot bounce  
the desired part of a song by using the track bouncing and auto punch in/out functions together).  
<Using bounced track data>  
By converting bounced track data (in two mono WAV files) to a stereo WAV file, you can export  
it to a personal computer or create an original audio CD using the internal (or an external) CD-R/  
RW drive. See page 90 for details about how to export a file to a personal computer. See the  
supplementary manual "How to use the CD-R/RW drive" for details about burning an audio CD  
using the internal (or an external) CD-R/RW drive.  
Rehearsal of track bouncing  
Before executing track bouncing, you can rehearse it. While rehearsing track bouncing, you can  
control the playback level, panning and reverb (or delay) send setting of each source track, as well as  
apply the mastering effect to the mixed L/R signals. We recommend to make rehearsal thoroughly  
until you are satisfied with the sound. The following assumes that the song you are going to execute  
track bouncing is loaded.  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
WAV FILE  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
3
3
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
3
4
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A
/
IN  
STORE  
+-_0  
B
/
OUT  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
3
2
4
1,3  
1)  
Raise the [MASTER] fader to the " " position.  
Set all the track faders down to the minimum  
position.  
Faders  
1 through 8 for bouncing.  
Playback levels of tracks 1 through 8  
[MASTER]  
Recording master levels of bouncing.  
2)  
3)  
Press the [PLAY] key to start playback from the  
beginning of the song.  
fader  
During rehearsal and actual track bouncing,  
the level meters on the screen show the fol-  
lowing signal levels.  
While playing back the song, adjust playback levels  
of tracks 1 through 8 using the track faders.  
You can also adjust panning for tracks 1 through  
4 and apply the reverb or delay to these tracks,  
as well as apply the mastering effect to the mixed  
sound. During rehearsal and actual track bounc-  
ing, the track faders and [MASTER] fader control  
the following signal levels.  
Meters  
Playback levels of tracks 1 through 8.  
1 through 8  
Output levels of STEREO OUT (= re-  
cording levels of bouncing)  
Meters  
L and R  
By raising the [PHONES VOL] control, you can  
hear the bounced signals.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track bouncing)  
and use the [MASTER] fader to adjust the mas-  
ter recording levels of the bounced signals ap-  
propriately while checking meters L/R. See  
"Using effects" on page 57 for details about  
the delay/reverb and mastering effects.  
4)  
After finishing rehearsal, press the [STOP] key  
to stop the recorder and locate it to the  
beginning of the song.  
Do not move the controls and faders after fin-  
ishing rehearsal. Use the track faders (1  
through 8) to control the track output levels,  
Actual track bouncing  
After finishing rehearsal, let's carry out actual track bouncing.  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
MIN  
MAX LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
/
2
1
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
WAV FILE  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
POWERFUL  
NATURAL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
R
L
L
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A
/
IN  
B
/
OUT  
STORE  
+-_0  
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
2
When track bouncing to a new song completes,  
the recorder automatically stops and the dis-  
play shows the home screen of the new song.  
The song name of the new song is given by the  
name of the original song with “-**” (** is a  
two-digit number).  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[1-8 > NEW SONG] key.  
The [1-8 > NEW SONG] key lights up and the  
display shows the screen below. If you execute  
track bouncing, press the [MENU/ENTER] knob  
while holding down the [RECORD] key.  
If you cancel track bouncing, press the [STOP]  
key.  
You can check the result by following the pro-  
cedure described in “Checking the bounced  
signals on tracks 7/8” on page 69.  
2)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob while holding down  
the [RECORD] key.  
<Note>: To cancel track bouncing in the middle,  
press the [STOP] key. Pressing the [STOP] key au-  
tomatically deletes the new song created in step 2  
above and turns off the bounce mode.  
Track bouncing starts. The mixed (bounced) sig-  
nals are recorded to tracks 7/8 of a new song.  
The screen example below shows that tracks 1  
through 8 of Song02 (whose name is “Moonlit”)  
is now being bounced to tracks 7/8 of the new  
song (Song04). Meters 1 through 8 show the play-  
back levels of tracks 1 through 8, while the L and  
R meters shows the recording levels of tracks 7/  
8 of Song04.  
<Note>: When you are going to execute track bounc-  
ing, if there is not enough space on the hard disk  
or 99 songs already exist on the disk, a warning  
message appears and the operation is canceled.  
<Track bouncing while mixing signals from [INPUT A]  
through [INPUT D]>  
When you bounce tracks 1 through 8 to tracks 7/8  
of the new song, you can also mix signals from [IN-  
PUT A] through [INPUT D] together (see page 72).  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track bouncing)  
Mixing signals of inputs A through D  
The MR-8HD/CD can mix input signals of [INPUT A] through [INPUT D]. The following diagram  
shows an example of mixing signals of INPUT A through INPUT D when bouncing tracks 1 through  
6 to tracks 7/8. As you can see, the signals of INPUT A through INPUT D are mixed to the L/R  
stereo buss together with the bounced signals.  
Reverb  
or  
DElay  
Playback  
Trk 1  
Playback  
Trk 2  
Playback  
Trk 3  
Playback  
Trk 4  
Playback  
Trk 5  
Playback  
Trk 6  
INPUT A  
TRIM  
INPUT B  
INPUT C  
INPUT D  
Bouncing  
Record  
Trk 7  
STEREO OUT (L, R)  
Record  
Trk 8  
Connecting sound sources to INPUT A through INPUT D  
[TO STEREO BUSS ON/OFF] key setting  
To mix the input signal of an input channel (any  
of INPUT A through INPUT D) to the L/R stereo  
buss, turn on the corresponding [TO STEREO  
BUSS ON/OFF] key.  
Before starting track bouncing, connect the de-  
sired sound source(s) to any desired input(s)  
between INPUT A and INPUT D.  
Sound source (s)  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT B  
BAL  
INPUT C  
BAL  
INPUT D  
BAL  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT B  
BAL  
INPUT C  
BAL  
INPUT D  
BAL  
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
DISTORTION  
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
[TRIM] control  
DISTORTION  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
TO STEREO BUSS  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
TO STEREO BUSS  
[TO STEREO BUSS ON/OFF] key  
Adjust the input level of each input using the  
[TRIM] control to match the balance with the  
bounced track levels.  
Also, you can adjust panning of each input for  
stereo mix. See the next page for details about  
how to set panning.  
When the [TO STEREO BUSS ON/OFF] key is  
turned on, the key illuminates in green. That is,  
when the key illuminates, input signal is sent to  
recording tracks. (Note that when the key  
flashes, the corresponding input is assigned to  
any recording track.)  
<Note>: If you press the [TO STEREO BUSS ON/OFF] key when make recording other than track bouncing, the  
key lamp may flash. This shows the input signal is routed to the armed track. That is, the input signal will be  
recorded to the armed track, in stead of mixed to the stereo buss.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track bouncing)  
Panning setting for INPUT A through INPUT D  
You can independently set panning for each of INPUT A through INPUT D.  
Each input signal is positioned in the mix according to the panning setting here.  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
desired item (any one of "Input A Pan" through  
"Input D Pan"), and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows the screen for making pan-  
ning setting of the selected input. The current  
setting flashes.  
In the screen example below, "Input A Pan" is se-  
lected and the default "CNT" is flashing.  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Input "  
on the second page, and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The display now shows the input menu screen.  
Flashing  
You can select the desired panning value from  
among R01 through R10 and L01 through L10,  
as well as "CNT" (center).  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
desired value, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The panning is set and the display returns to the  
previous screen.  
The default panning settings are as below.  
You can set each input to the desired panning  
position from L10 (hard left) to R10 (hard  
right).  
In the screen example below, "Input A Pan" is set  
to "R10".  
CNT (center position)  
CNT (center position)  
CNT (center position)  
CNT (center position)  
Input A  
Input B  
Input C  
Input D  
Flashing  
<Tip>: You can directly access to the input  
menu screen by a long press of the [TO STE-  
REO BUSS ON/OFF] key of the desired input  
channel. On the input menu screen accessed  
in this way, the panning setting item for  
the corresponding input is highlighted.  
For example, a long press of the [TO STE-  
REO BUSS ON/OFF] key of [INPUT D] directly  
accesses to the screen shown below.  
You can also make panning setting of another  
input in the same manner as above.  
5)  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
By selecting " Back" and pressing the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob, the display returns to the  
previous screen. Therefore, you can also exit  
the menu mode by repeating this operation.  
Flashing  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track bouncing)  
Bouncing the desired part of a song  
Typically, bouncing is executed from the beginning to the end of a song, as shown in Figure 1  
below. However, you can bounce only the desired part by using the track bouncing and punch  
in/out functions together. The following assumes that the song you are going to execute track  
bouncing is loaded and you finished rehearsal of track bouncing.  
The following procedure shows the example of bouncing the desired part of a song in the "Bounce  
1-6 > 7/8" mode (<Note>: In the1-8 > NEW SONG” mode, you cannot bounce the desired part of a song  
by using the track bouncing and auto punch in/out functions together).  
Bouncing the desired part (Fig. 2)  
Typical bouncing (Fig. 1)  
Punch in point  
Punch out point  
(=LOCATE A point)  
(=LOCATE B point)  
ABS ZERO  
REC END  
TRK 1  
TRK 1  
TRK 2  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 5  
TRK 6  
TRK 2  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 5  
TRK 6  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
1)  
Set the punch-in and punch-out points (see page  
54).  
5)  
Press the [RECORD] key while holding down the  
[PLAY] key.  
By pressing the [PLAY] key while holding down  
the [STOP] key, you can play back the part  
between the punch-in and punch-out points  
(see page 44).  
The "  
" icon is shown and the recorder  
starts playback. It automatically starts  
recording (bouncing) when it reaches the  
punch-in point.  
Punch-in point  
Punch-out point  
(=LOCATE A point)  
(=LOCATE B point)  
2)  
3)  
Locate the recorder to a position before the  
punch-in point.  
TRK 1  
TRK 2  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 5  
TRK 6  
Press the [1-4 > 5/6, 1-6 > 7/8] key to set the  
bounce mode to "1-6>7/8".  
When setting the bounce mode to "1-6 > 7/8",  
tracks 7/8 automatically enter the input  
monitor mode and "  
home screen.  
" lights on the  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
Recording  
(track bouncing)  
Playback  
(Input monitor)  
Playback  
Lighting  
The recorder stops recording (bouncing) at the  
punch-out point and returns to playback, while  
Lighting  
the auto punch mode exits and "  
the screen turns off.  
" in  
Flashing  
<Note>: During playback in the operation  
above, you cannot monitor the sound. You  
can monitor the sound (bounced sound)  
only during recording between punch-in and  
punch-out points.  
4)  
Press the [AUTO PUNCH] key to activate the auto  
punch mode.  
When the auto punch mode is active,  
"
" lights on the home screen.  
6)  
Press the [STOP] key to stop the recorder.  
Check the result by playing back the bounced  
tracks, as described earlier.  
Lighting  
<Note>: If you are not satisfied with the re-  
sult, press the [UNDO/REDO] key to redo the  
operation.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Rhythm guide function)  
Rhythm guide function  
The MR-8HD/CD offers the rhythm guide function, which allows output-  
ting the rhythm guide click during recording.  
This chapter describes how to output the rhythm guide, set the time  
signature/tempo and create the conductor map.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Rhythm guide function)  
Using the rhythm guide function  
The MR-8HD/CD provides the metronome function which can output the rhythm guide click  
during recording. You can easily output the guide click from the [STEREO OUT L, R] jacks by  
pressing the [RHYTHM GUIDE] key on the top panel. Two types of the rhythm guide are available:  
one has the constant time signature/tempo throughout a song, while the other has the pro-  
grammed time signature/tempo map.  
INPUT  
A
SELECT  
INPUT  
BAL  
A
INPUT  
BAL  
B
INPUT  
BAL  
C
INPUT  
BAL  
D
STEREO OUT  
R
L
1
To output the rhythm guide click,  
turn on the [RHYTHM GUIDE]  
key. By default, the guide click is  
output at time signature=4/4,  
tempo=120.  
PHONES  
2
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
TRIM  
MIN  
GUITAR  
MAX LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
POWER  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
RHYTHM  
GUIDE  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
REVERB DELAY TIME  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT  
AMP SIMULATION  
CONTRAST  
/
A
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
1-4  
1-6  
>
5/6  
7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8  
1-8  
>
>
>
SONG  
WAV FILE  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU  
/
ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
You can output the rhythm guide  
click according to the desired  
constant time signature and  
tempo, as well as the pro-  
grammed rhythm guide click  
based on the conductor map.  
EFFECT SEND  
POWERFUL  
NATURAL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
JKL4  
MNO5  
PAN  
LOCATE  
L
R
L
L
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A
/
IN  
B
/
OUT  
STORE  
+-_0  
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
F
FWD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
When recording starts, the MR-8HD/CD simultaneously starts feeding the rhythm  
guide click from the [STEREO OUT L, R] jacks at the selected level (the default is 80).  
Note that the rhythm guide click is not output during track bouncing. The output  
level of the rhythm guide click is shown on the L and R level meters.  
Note that you can monitor the rhythm guide click via headphones or (a) monitor  
speaker(s). You cannot record the rhythm guide click to any MR-8HD/CD track(s). If  
you do not want to output the rhythm guide click, turn off the [RHYTHM GUIDE] key.  
Setting the time signature and tempo  
You can set the default rhythm guide (time signature: 4/4, tempo: 120), output level, etc. using  
the "Rhythm Guide" menu in the menu mode.  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back"  
returns to the previous screen).  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Rhythm Guide ", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
Tip!: While the home screen is shown and  
the recorder is stopped, long press of the  
[RHYTHM GUIDE] key directly brings up the  
screen for setting the rhythm guide.  
The display now shows the screen for setting  
the rhythm guide, where " Back" is  
highlighted.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Rhythm guide function)  
4. Tempo:Tempo setting  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
desired item, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The current setting of the selected item starts  
flashing. On the screen examples below, the  
"Rhythm Guide" item is highlighted (see the  
upper screen) and the [MENU/ENTER] knob is  
pressed (see the lower screen).  
The default is "120bpm". You can select between  
30 and 250 bpm. The setting here is effective from  
the beginning to the end of the song when the  
"Conductor Map" item is set to "Off" (i.e. the same  
tempo all through the song).  
When the "Conductor Map" item is set to "On",the  
setting here is ineffective. See the table on the  
below for details.  
5. Int ClickLevel: Internal click output level  
The default is "80". You can set it between 0 and  
99.  
To exit the menu mode, press the [STOP] key, or se-  
lect " Back" and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob re-  
peatedly.  
Flashing  
The table below shows how the "Rhythm Guide" and  
"Conductor Map" item settings affect the conditions of  
rhythm guide output and bar/beat indication.  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
desired option, and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
Bar/beat  
indication  
Rhythm guide  
On/off conditions  
The "Signature"  
and "Tempo"  
item settings are  
effective.  
The selected option (in the example above,  
"On" or "Off") is confirmed and the display  
returns to the previous screen.  
Rhythm Guide: Off  
Conductor Map: Off  
No output  
You can make setting for each item similarly.  
The rhythm guide setting screen has the following  
items.  
Rhythm Guide: Off  
Conductor Map: On  
The conductor  
map is effective.  
No output  
Output:  
1
2
Rhythm Guide: On  
Conductor Map: Off  
The tempo and The "Signature"  
time signature and "Tempo"  
setting on this item settings are  
screen is effec- effective.  
tive.  
3
4
5
Output:  
Rhythm Guide: On  
Conductor Map: On  
1. Rhythm Guide: On/off selection of the rhythm guide  
The setting you make here is reflected to the  
[RHYTHM GUIDE] key (the key is lit when ON, while  
it is unlit when OFF). Conversely, when you turn  
on or off the rhythm guide using the  
The conductor The conductor  
map setting is map is effective.  
effective.  
[RHYTHM GUIDE] key, the status is reflected to  
this screen. See the table on the right for details.  
<Note>: When “Conductor Map” is set to “On”, the  
Signature” and “Tempo” fields show “- - -” as be-  
low. This indicates that the signature and tempo  
values set on this screen are ineffective, while the  
conductor map setting is effective.  
2. Conductor Map: On/off selection of the conductor map  
This item enables or disables the conductor map  
(see "Conductor map" described later).  
The default is "Off". See the table on the right for  
details.  
3. Signature:Time signature setting  
The default is "4/4". You can select from among  
1/4 through 5/4 and 1/8 through 8/8.  
The setting here is effective from the beginning to  
the end of the song when the "Conductor Map" item  
is set to "Off" (i.e. the same time signature all  
through the song). When the "Conductor Map" item  
is set to "On", the setting here is ineffective.  
See the table on the right for details.  
See the next page for details about how to set the  
conductor map.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Rhythm guide function)  
Creating the conductor map  
The MR-8HD/CD can output the rhythm guide click which follows the "conductor map" during  
recording. It can also output MIDI clock and song position pointer which follows the "conductor  
map" from the [MIDI OUT] connector.  
The conductor map consists of the time signature map and tempo map. You can add "events" to  
each map. Each event specifies the time signature or tempo, as well as the position from which  
the specified time signature or tempo is effective. The time signature or tempo specified by each  
event is effective until the next event in the map appears.  
For example, if the time signature map has two events -- one sets "4/4" at the first bar 1, while the  
other sets "2/4" at the third bar --, the song is played in 4/4 from bar 1 to 2, and played in 2/4  
from bar 3 to the end.  
For another example, if the tempo map has two events -- one sets "120" at the first bar 1/first beat  
while the other sets "90" at bar 12/beat 2 --, the song is played at 120 bpm from bar 1 to bar 12/  
beat 1, while it is played at 90 from bar 12/beat 2 to the end.  
4
4
120  
180  
3
4
90  
120  
Setting the signature map  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Signature Map " on the second page, and press  
the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows the signature map screen  
on which the current time signature events are  
listed. Each event specifies the bar number and  
time signature. By default, "1Bar -> 4/4" and  
"---Bar -> ---" are listed. In this condition, the  
song is played in 4/4 from the beginning to  
the end.  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is high  
lighted initially (selecting " Back" returns to  
the previous screen). You can also return to  
the previous screen by pressing the [REWIND]  
key.  
"---Bar -> ---" is used to create a new event.  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Song ",  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the song editing screen,  
where " Back" is highlighted.  
The procedure example below shows how to  
add the following events to the signature map.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Rhythm guide function)  
7)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Sig. = 4/4", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
"4/4" starts flashing and you can now set the  
time signature.  
Bar 1 through bar 3:  
Bar 4 through bar 7:  
Bar 8 through bar 11:  
Bar 12 through bar 15:  
Bar 16 through the last bar:  
4/4  
3/4  
4/4  
5/8  
3/4  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"---Bar -> ---", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the screen for setting  
the new time signature event, where " Back"  
is highlighted.  
8)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
desired time signature, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
In this procedure example, enter "3/4".  
The display returns to the previous screen.  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Bar = 2Bar", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
"2Bar" starts flashing and you can now set the  
bar number.  
9)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"[ENTER]" at the bottom, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The new time signature event is set and the  
display shows the screen as below.  
In this condition, the song is played in 4/4 from  
bar 1 to bar 3 and in 3/4 from bar 4.  
6)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the  
desired bar number, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
In this procedure example, enter "4Bar".  
The display returns to the previous screen.  
Repeat steps 5 through 9 until creating all nec-  
essary events.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Rhythm guide function)  
• Editing a time signature event  
• Deleting an unnecessary time signature event  
You can edit a time signature event.  
You can delete an unnecessary time signature  
event.  
1)  
On the time signature map screen, rotate the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to select the event you want  
to edit, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
As with the description on the previous page, the  
display now shows the screen for setting the event.  
For example, let's select "8Bar -> 4/4".  
1)  
On the time signature map screen, rotate the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to select the event you want  
to delete, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
As with the description on the previous page,  
the display now shows the screen for setting  
the event.  
For example, let's select "8Bar -> 4/4".  
2)  
To change the bar number, rotate the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Bar = 8Bar", and  
press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"[DELETE]" at the bottom, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
To change the time signature, rotate the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Sig. = 4/4", and  
press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The event is immediately deleted and the  
display returns to the signature map screen.  
As with the procedure described on the previous  
page, you can now set the bar number or time  
signature.  
3)  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to edit the value,  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
In this procedure example, enter "10" for the  
bar number.  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"[ENTER]" at the bottom, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The editing is confirmed and the display returns  
to the signature map screen.  
<After deleting>  
<Before editing>  
<Before deleting>  
To exit the menu mode, press the [STOP] key.  
<After editing>  
To exit the menu mode, press the [STOP] key.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Rhythm guide function)  
Editing the bar offset  
By default, the bar/beat value at the beginning (ABS ZERO) of the song is set to "bar -2/beat 1".  
This offset (the bar/beat value at ABS ZERO) is called "bar offset". You can change the default bar  
offset to the desired value.  
1)  
On the second page of the song editing menu  
screen, highlight "Bar Offset" and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The current offset value (by default, "-2Bar")  
starts flashing.  
You can see the bar offset value on the home  
screen when the recorder is at the beginning  
of the song (ABS 0).  
The screen example below shows the home  
screen when the bar offset is set to “-4 bars”.  
The default home screen (bar offset = -2 bars).  
The table below shows the available offset val-  
ues.  
The home screen when the  
bar offset is set to “-4 bars”.  
Option  
-8Bar  
Meaning  
Meaning  
Option  
-3Bar  
ABS Zero= bar -8  
ABS Zero= bar -7  
ABS Zero= bar -3  
ABS Zero= bar -2  
-7Bar  
-2Bar  
-6Bar ABS Zero = bar -6 -1Bar ABS Zero= bar -1  
-5Bar  
-4Bar  
0Bar  
ABS Zero= bar 1  
ABS Zero= bar -5  
ABS Zero= bar -4  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
desired offset value, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The selected offset value is confirmed, while  
the display returns to the previous screen.  
To exit the menu mode, press the [STOP] key.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Rhythm guide function)  
Setting the tempo map  
After setting the time signature map, you have to create the tempo map by adding the necessary  
tempo event(s). Like a time signature event, a tempo event specifies the tempo at the tempo  
changing point. Each tempo specified by a tempo event is effective until the next event appears.  
For example, you can set the tempo to 120 at the third beat in bar 4, and set to 90 at the second  
beat in bar 12, etc.  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back"  
returns to the previous screen). You can also  
return to the previous screen by pressing the  
[REWIND] key.  
The procedure example below shows how to  
add the following tempo events to the tempo  
map.  
Bar 1/beat 1:  
Bar 4/beat 2:  
Bar 8/beat 3:  
Bar 12/beat 1:  
Bar 16/beat 4:  
120 bpm  
180 bpm  
90 bpm  
120 bpm  
250 bpm  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Song ",  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the song editing screen,  
where " Back" is highlighted.  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "---Bar -  
-> ---bpm", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the screen for setting  
the new tempo event, where " Back" is  
highlighted.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Tempo Map " on the second page, and press  
the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows the tempo map screen on  
which the current tempo events are listed.  
Each event specifies the bar/beat position and  
tempo. By default, "1Bar 1 -> 120 bpm" and  
"---Bar - -> ---bpm" are listed. In this  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Bar = 2Bar", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
"2Bar" starts flashing and you can now set the  
bar number. You can enter the bar number  
between 1 and 999.  
condition, the song starts in 120 bpm and there  
is no tempo change. "---Bar - -> ---bpm" is used  
to create a new tempo event.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Rhythm guide function)  
"120bpm" starts flashing and you can now set  
the tempo. You can enter the tempo between  
30 and 250.  
6)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the  
desired bar number, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
In this procedure example, enter "4Bar".  
The display returns to the previous screen.  
10)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the desired  
tempo, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
In this procedure example, enter "180bpm".  
The display returns to the previous screen.  
7)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Beat = 1 ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
"1 " starts flashing and you can now set the  
beat number. You can enter the beat number  
between 1 and 8.  
11)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "[ENTER]"  
at the bottom, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The new tempo event is set and the display  
shows the screen as below. In this condition,  
the song is played in 120 bpm from the  
beginning to bar 4/beat 1 and in 180 from bar  
4/beat 2 to the end.  
8)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the  
desired beat number, and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
In this procedure example, let's enter "2 ".  
The display returns to the previous screen.  
9)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Tempo = 120bpm", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
Repeat steps 4 through 11 until creating all  
necessary tempo events.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Rhythm guide function)  
• Editing a tempo event  
To exit the menu mode, press the [STOP] key,  
or select " Back" and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob repeatedly.  
You can edit a tempo event.  
1)  
On the tempo map screen, rotate the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to select the event you want  
to edit, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
As with the description on the previous page,  
the display now shows the screen for setting  
the event.  
• Deleting an unnecessary tempo event  
You can delete an unnecessary tempo event.  
For example, let's select "12Bar 1 -> 120bpm".  
1)  
On the tempo map screen, rotate the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to select the event you want  
to delete, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
As with the description on the previous page,  
the display now shows the screen for setting  
the event.  
For example, let's select "12Bar 1 ->120bpm".  
2)  
To change the bar number, rotate the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Bar = 12Bar", and  
press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
To change the beat number, rotate the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Beat = 1 ", and  
press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
To change the tempo, rotate the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob to select "Tempo = 120bpm", and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
As with the procedure described on the previous  
page, you can now set the bar number, beat  
number or tempo.  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"[DELETE]" at the bottom, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The event is immediately deleted and the  
display returns to the tempo map screen.  
3)  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to edit the value,  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
In this procedure example, let's enter "10" for  
the bar number.  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "[ENTER]"  
at the bottom, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The editing is confirmed and the display returns  
to the tempo map screen.  
<After deleting>  
<Before editing>  
To exit the menu mode, press the [STOP] key,  
or select "<< Back" and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob repeatedly.  
<After editing>  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (MIDI synchronization)  
MIDI synchronization  
By connecting the external MIDI devices (such as a sequencer, sound  
module, computer, etc.) via the [MIDI OUT] connector of the MR-8HD/CD,  
you can make powerful recording.  
For example, by synchronizing a sequencer with the MR-8HD/CD during  
playback, you can mix down signals (such as a vocal, guitar, etc.) re-  
corded on the MR-8HD/CD tracks and audio from a sound module.  
You can synchronize MIDI with the MR-8HD/CD by connecting a MIDI  
device to the [MIDI OUT] connector on the MR-8HD/CD and sending out  
MTC (MIDI time code) or MIDI clock (with Song Position Pointer) from  
the MR-8HD/CD.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (MIDI synchronization)  
Synchronization using MTC  
The following describes how to synchronize a sequencer to the MR-8HD/CD which supports  
MTC (MIDI Time code).  
Connection  
Connect the [MIDI OUT] connector of the MR-8HD/CD to the [MIDI IN] connector of an external MIDI  
sequencer using a MIDI cable. (Note that no MIDI cable is supplied with the MR-8HD/CD. Use a  
commercially available MIDI cable.)  
INPUT A SEL  
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
GTR DIST  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AC-IN  
USB  
USB HOST  
MIDUT  
FOOT SW  
MIDI IN  
MIDI sequencer, etc.  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back" returns  
to the previous screen).  
Settings of the MR-8HD/CD & MIDI sequencer  
1)  
Set the "Midi Sync Out" item in the "System" menu  
of the menu mode to "MTC" and the "MTC Frame  
Rate" to an appropriate frame rate.  
See "MIDI sync/MTC frame rate settings"  
described below for details.  
2)  
3)  
Enable the external MIDI sequencer to synchronize  
to MTC.  
See the operation manual of the sequencer for  
details.  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"System ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
system menu screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially.  
Press the [PLAY] key of the MR-8HD/CD to start  
playback.  
The sequencer automatically starts playback  
while synchronizing to the MR-8HD/CD.  
MIDI sync/MTC frame rate settings  
While the MR-8HD/CD is stopped, you can set  
the reference of MIDI synchronization to "MTC"  
and the MTC frame rate appropriately to match  
the sequencer.  
<MTC start time>  
The MTC from the MR-8HD/CD has one hour  
offset to the ABS time (the offset value is fixed).  
Therefore, when you start the MR-8HD/CD from  
the beginning of a song (ABS ZERO), the MTC  
starts from "01h 00m 00s 00f".  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Midi Sync Out=***", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (MIDI synchronization)  
The current option (the default is "Off") flashes.  
You can now select the desired option (the  
available options are Off, CLK and MTC).  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"MTC FrameRate=**", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The current option (the default is "25") flashes.  
You can now select the desired frame rate (the  
options are "24", "25", "30nd" and "30df").  
Flashing  
No signal is output from the [MIDI OUT]  
connector. This is the default.  
Off  
Flashing  
MIDI clock with Song Position Pointer is  
CLK  
output from the [MIDI OUT] connector.  
6)  
7)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
desired frame rate, and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The selected frame rate is now effective, while  
"MTC FrameRate=**" is highlighted on the screen.  
MIDI time code is output from the [MIDI  
OUT] connector.  
MTC  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "MTC",  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
"Midi Sync Out" is now set to "MTC", while  
"Midi Sync Out" is highlighted on the screen.  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
Synchronization using MIDI clock  
The following describes how to synchronize a sequencer to the MR-8HD/CD using MIDI clock.  
Use this method if the sequencer does not support MTC (MIDI Time code).  
Settings of the MR-8HD/CD & MIDI sequencer  
<Notes>  
• To synchronize a sequencer to the MR-8HD/  
1)  
Set the "Midi Sync Out" item in the "System" menu  
of the menu mode to "Clk".  
CD using MIDI clock, you have to make the  
signature/tempo map in the MR-8HD/CD.  
The MIDI clock is output based on the  
signature/tempo map in the MR-8HD/CD.  
When you record MIDI sounds, synchronize the  
sequencer to the MIDI clock fed from the  
MR-8HD/CD.  
See "MIDI sync/MTC frame rate settings"  
described above about how to set.  
2)  
Create the signature/tempo map by setting  
"Signature Map" and "Tempo Map" items in the  
"Song" menu of the menu mode appropriately.  
See "Using the rhythm guide function" on page  
76 for details about how to set these items.  
Generally, a sequencer supporting MIDI song  
position pointer as well as MIDI clock can  
synchronize to the MR-8HD/CD when you start  
playback of the MR-8HD/CD from the middle  
of a song. It locates the current song position  
and chases the MR-8HD/CD. However, note that  
some sequencer may not synchronize to the  
MR-8HD/CD.  
3)  
4)  
Enable the external MIDI sequencer to synchronize  
to MIDI clock.  
See the operation manual of the sequencer for  
details.  
Press the [PLAY] key of the MR-8HD/CD to start  
playback.  
Connection  
The sequencer also starts playback in sync with  
the MR-8HD/CD.  
As with the connection for MTC synchroniza-  
tion, connect the [MIDI OUT] connector of the  
MR-8HD/CD to the [MIDI IN] connector of an ex-  
ternal MIDI sequencer using a MIDI cable.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (MIDI synchronization)  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Data export to a personal computer)  
Data export to a personal computer  
This chapter describes how to export song data on tracks 7/8 to a per-  
sonal computer.  
To export the desired song data to a personal computer, you must con-  
vert the song data to a stereo WAV file.  
A converted stereo WAV file can be burned to an audio CD (CD-DA)  
using the internal CD-R/RW drive (or an external CD-R/RW drive con-  
nected to the [USB HOST] port). (See the supplementary manual "How to  
use the CD-R/RW drive" for details.)  
You can also burn a converted stereo WAV file to an audio CD (CD-DA)  
by exporting it to a personal computer and using the CD burning func-  
tion on the personal computer.  
<Notes on USB connection with Mac OS>  
When making USB connection with a Macintosh computer, note that only Mac OS X  
or higher is supported. Do not connect to a Macintosh computer with the earlier  
version. The song data on the MR-8HD/CD may be damaged.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Data export to a personal computer)  
WAV file conversion  
This section describes how to convert audio data on tracks 7/8 which has been bounced or  
recorded in stereo to a stereo WAV file. The converted stereo WAV file can be exported to a  
personal computer or used to create an audio CD (CD-DA) using the internal CD-R/RW drive (or  
an external CD-R/RW drive connected to the [USB HOST] port). See page 92 for details about how  
to export the converted WAV file to your personal computer. See the supplementary manual  
"How to use the CD-R/RW drive" for details about how to create an audio CD.  
Procedure of file conversion  
Two mono WAV files recorded on tracks 7/8  
The following assumes that the song whose track  
data you want to convert is loaded.  
are converted to a stereo WAV file as shown  
below. (Note that only files recorded on tracks  
7/8 can be converted to a stereo WAV file.)  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[7/8 > STEREO WAV FILE] key to enable the file  
conversion function.  
Track 7  
(L ch)  
Track 8  
(R ch)  
Stereo  
(L, R)  
The display shows the "7/8 > STEREOWAV FILE"  
screen, on which "ABS0-Rec End" is highlighted.  
<Note>: If you are going to make conversion  
when no WAV data exists on tracks 7/8, the  
error message ("Track 7/8 Empty!") appears  
and the operation is canceled.  
You can convert all track data (from ABS ZERO  
to REC END) or data of a specified part (be-  
tween the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points).  
2)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
"ABS0-Rec End" starts flashing, and you can  
now select the conversion range between  
"ABS0-Rec End" and "LOCATE A - LOCATE B".  
<Note>: If you want to convert a part of track  
data, you have to set the LOCATE A and LO-  
CATE B points in advance.  
Flashing  
<Hint>: You can play back a converted ste-  
reo WAV file for checking, as well as set CUE  
points for dividing file data into individual  
CD tracks before writing it to a CD-R/RW disc.  
See the supplementary manual “How to use  
the CD-R/RW drive” for details.  
To convert all track data, select "ABS0-Rec End".  
To convert a specified range, select "LOCATE A  
- LOCATE B".  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
conversion range and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
Enabling the file conversion  
The selection is confirmed and the display  
returns to the previous screen.  
You can enable the WAV file conversion func-  
tion by pressing the [7/8 > STEREOWAV FILE] key.  
"NAME = *********" shows the name for the con-  
verted file, and you can enter a desired name.  
Initially, it shows the name of the source file,  
therefore, if you do not change the name, the  
same file name is given.  
1-4 > 5/6  
1-6 > 7/8  
NEW  
STEREO  
7/8 >  
WAV FILE  
1-8 >  
SONG  
BOUNCE  
ABC1  
DEF2  
G
The following assumes that the file name is not  
changed. For details about how to edit a name,  
see "Editing a file name" on the next page.  
[7/8 > STEREO WAV FILE] key  
When you convert data in the same song more  
than once, you have to give a different name  
for each converted file. See the <Note> on the  
next page.  
You can disable the WAV file conversion func-  
tion by pressing the [STOP] key.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Data export to a personal computer)  
4)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob while holding  
down the [RECORD] key.  
<Editing a file name>  
The file conversion starts and the percent  
number on the screen counts up as the  
conversion progresses.  
You can edit a file name by the following  
procedure.  
To cancel the conversion in the middle, press  
the [STOP] key.  
1)  
After selecting the range of track data to be  
converted, rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob  
to move the cursor to "NAME" and press  
the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The rightmost character of the file name  
starts flashing. You can now start editing.  
<Note>: If you cancel the conversion in the  
middle, no file (incomplete file) is created.  
When the conversion is completed, the display  
shows "Completed".  
Flashing  
5)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The MR-8HD/CD quits the conversion function  
and the display returns to the home screen.  
While the rightmost character is flash-  
ing, pressing the [UNDO/REDO]/[DE-  
LETE] key repeatedly deletes the cur-  
rent file name.  
<Note>: If you convert data with the same  
name as previously converted data, the fol-  
lowing screen appears on the display.  
2)  
Enter a new name using the character  
entry keys.  
This screen warns you that the WAV file with  
the same name already exists and asks you  
to carry out the conversion by overwriting  
the existing file or cancel the conversion.  
Pressing a different character entry key  
automatically moves the cursor right.  
If two successive characters are assigned  
to the same character entry key, rotate  
the [MENU/ENTER] knob after selecting the  
first character to move the cursor right.  
3)  
After entering a new name, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
If you carry out the conversion by overwrit-  
ing the existing file, rotate the [MENU/EN-  
TER] knob to move the cursor to "[YES]",  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
Then, by pressing the [MENU/ENTER] knob while  
holding down the [RECORD] key to carry out the  
WAV file conversion.  
If you do not want to overwrite the existing  
file, rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move  
the cursor to "[NO]", then press the [MENU/  
ENTER] knob. The display returns to show  
the screen for editing the file name, so you  
can enter a different file name and then  
carry out the conversion.  
If you want to cancel the conversion when  
the screen above is shown, rotate the [MENU/  
ENTER] knob to move the cursor to "[NO]"  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob to show  
the screen for editing the file name, and then  
press the [STOP] key to quit the conversion  
function.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Data export to a personal computer)  
Exporting data to a personal computer  
The MR-8HD/CD is equipped with the USB port for direct connection to a personal computer  
using a USB cable.  
The USB connection allows you to export the stereo WAV file data, which is converted from a pair  
of mono WAV files on tracks 7/8, to your computer. The exported data can be played back or  
edited using a computer's music software application, or used as a source when burning an  
original audio CD using a CD-R/RW drive. You can also use this exporting capability for backing  
up data to a personal computer when the remaining space of a hard disk becomes small.  
PC  
INPUT  
A
SEL  
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
GTR DIST  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AC-IN  
USB  
USB HOST  
MIDI OUT  
FOOT SW  
Windows Me/2000/XP machine supporting USB  
connection  
USB cable  
Notes on exporting a file  
Connection to a personal computer  
Connect the [USB] port of the MR-8HD/CD to  
the USB port of a personal computer using a  
USB cable, as shown above. (A USB cable is not  
supplied with the MR-8HD/CD.)  
<Note>: You can export only a stereo WAV file  
which is converted from a pair of mono WAV  
files on tracks 7/8, as described earlier in "WAV  
file conversion". A mono WAV file or undo file  
cannot be exported to a personal computer.  
See the next page for details about the export-  
able files.  
<Caution>: Use the [USB] port for connection to a  
personal computer. Do not connect the [USB HOST]  
port to a personal computer.  
<Disk protection>  
By default, the “disk protect” function which is  
effective in the USB mode is set to “On”.  
In this condition, the MR-8HD/CD can export  
data to a personal computer but cannot im-  
port data from a computer. This is for pro-  
tecting the MR-8HD/CD internal hard disk  
from importing a file from a computer inap-  
propriately and destroying the MR-8HD/CD  
song data.  
USB  
USB HOST  
<Note>: Only Windows Me, 2000 and XP comput-  
ers, as well as Macintosh computers with OS X or  
higher, can be used with the MR-8HD/CD.  
Other computers cannot be used. Check your com-  
puter before making connection.  
You can enable or disable this function, how-  
ever, we recommend using the MR-8HD/CD  
by setting it to “On”.  
If you use the MR-8HD/CD by setting the “disk  
protect” function to “Off”, read “Archiving a  
song” on page 95 before using. See page 94  
for details about how to make the “disk protec-  
tion” setting.  
<Notes on USB connection with Mac OS>  
When making USB connection with a Macintosh  
computer, note that only Mac OS X or higher is  
supported. Do not connect to a Macintosh com-  
puter with the earlier version. The song data on  
the MR-8HD/CD may be damaged.  
<Note on backup>  
When exporting song data on the hard disk to a  
personal computer for backup, always export the  
whole song folder. You cannot export individual  
track data. See page 95 for details. See “Archiving a  
song” on page 95 for details about song data  
backup.  
* All company names and model names mentioned  
in this manual are trademarks or registered trade-  
marks of their respective holders.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Data export to a personal computer)  
Exporting a WAV file to a personal computer  
The following describes the procedure for ex-  
porting a WAV file to a Windows ME computer.  
<Important note>  
Converted stereo WAV  
files are located in the "2  
Song  
MIX" folder in the Song  
folder, as shown below. So  
you can export only a ste-  
2 MIX  
reo WAV file in the "2 MIX"  
folder (indicated by an ar-  
row).  
<Note>: By default, the disk protect func-  
tion is enabled. In this condition, when the  
MR-8HD/CD enters the USB mode, “<DISK  
PROTECTED>” is shown in the USB screen,  
as above.  
*********.wav  
#####001.wav  
#####002.wav  
Note that, if you export a  
WAV file which is located  
in a folder other than the  
"2 MIX" folder, the MR-  
8HD/CD may malfunc-  
tion.  
<Note>: While the MR-8HD/CD is in the USB  
mode, all keys except the [STOP] key are  
ineffective. Pressing the [STOP] key exits the  
USB mode.  
#####003.wav  
#####008.wav  
5)  
6)  
Connect the MR-8HD/CD to a personal computer  
using a USB cable.  
1)  
2)  
Turn on the power of the personal computer and  
the MR-8HD/CD.  
Open "My computer" on the computer screen.  
You see the "Removable disk" drive added on  
the computer. The first time you connect the  
MR-8HD/CD, the device driver is installed  
automatically.  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu  
mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially.  
7)  
Open the added Removable disk drive, and  
select the stereo WAV file in the desired song  
folder, then copy to the computer.  
When you open the added Removable disk  
drive, the contents of the MR-8HD/CD hard  
disk are shown, in which you can see all the  
song folders.  
Open the "2 MIX" folder in the desired song  
folder, and select the stereo WAV file, then copy  
it to the computer.  
3)  
Highlight "USB " by rotating the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob, then press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows the USB menu screen.  
<Note>: After copying a WAV file in the folder  
to a computer, the original file remains. How-  
ever, if you execute "move to another folder",  
the original file on the disk is lost.  
8)  
When the data export completes, disconnect the  
MR-8HD/CD from the personal computer.  
<Note>: To disconnect the MR-8HD/CD from  
the personal computer after completing the  
data export, make sure that the [RECORD]  
key indicator is not lit, and follow the pro-  
cedure for hardware disconnection of Win-  
dows.  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
cursor to “USB Device Mode ”, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
9)  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
The MR-8HD/CD enters the USB mode and the  
display shows the screen as below.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Data export to a personal computer)  
Protecting the hard disk  
The MR-8HD/CD internal hard disk is protected by default.  
The protection is effective only in the USB mode in which the MR-8HD/CD is used with a personal  
computer. You can make the hard disk “read only” (protected) or “read/write enabled” (unprotected).  
The default is “read only”. As mentioned earlier in “Disk protection” on page 92, if you transfer  
song data from a computer to the MR-8HD/CD improperly, the data may be damaged. To avoid  
such an accident, we recommended enabling hard disk protection. To disabling the disk protection,  
follow the procedure below.  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially.  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select “Off”,  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The selection is confirmed and the display  
returns to the previous screen.  
Flashing  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to selectUSB ”  
on the second page, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the USB menu screen,  
where “ Back” is highlighted. Selecting  
Back” returns to the previous screen.  
You can also return to the previous screen by  
pressing the [REWIND] key.  
The disk is “read/write enabled”  
(unprotected). You can transfer data  
between the MR-8HD/CD and a computer  
in both ways.  
Off  
The disk is “read only” (protected).  
On  
You can transfer data only from the MR-  
8HD/CD to a computer (default setting).  
5)  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
<Note>: When you enter the USB mode while the  
disk protection is disabled, the screen as below is  
shown. In this condition, the hard disk is “read/  
write enabled” and you can bi-directionally trans-  
fer song data between a computer and the MR-  
8HD/CD.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to highlightDisk  
Protect=**”, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The current setting (the default is “On”)  
flashes.  
Flashing  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Data export to a personal computer)  
Archiving a song  
You can archive song data recorded by the MR-8HD/CD by using either of the following meth-  
ods.  
(1) Using the WAV Manager supplied by Fostex  
The WAV Manager converts each track data to a single mono file. Data is compressed so you  
can save the file in small size to a personal computer. This method is useful for exporting  
data to a PC software application for multitrack recording.  
For details about how to use the WAV Manager, see the owner's manual supplied with the  
WAV Manager. You can download the WAV Manager from Fostex web site (http://  
www.fostex.com).  
(2) Using drag & drop technique  
You can copy a song folder using drag & drop technique. This method allows saving all data  
in the folder (including the history data, etc.).  
• Exporting data to a personal computer  
1)  
Connect the MR-8HD/CD to a personal computer via USB, and open the root folder.  
You can copy each song folder in the root folder to the personal computer.  
2)  
3)  
Copy a desired song folder to the personal computer using drag & drop technique.  
After making copy, exit the USB mode.  
<Note>: When drag & drop the folder on your personal computer, use the "copy"  
function. If you use the "move" function, not only the song on the MR-8HD/CD is  
deleted but also other songs on the MR-8HD/CD may be destroyed. We recommend to  
enable the disk protection (the default is "enabled") when executing data copy.  
Using this method, you can also copy the hidden folder which includes hidden files  
"deleted" by the MR-8HD/CD song management operation. Copied hidden files can  
be used as a normal song files by turning off the hidden attribute by the computer.  
<Note>: If you cannot see the hidden folder, consult the manual of your personal  
computer.  
• Importing data from a personal computer  
When importing data from a personal computer to the MR-8HD/CD, there is the dan-  
ger that the MR-8HD/CD file system may be destroyed. Especially, deleting or adding  
files many times may cause the fragmentation of FAT32, resulting in sound jump  
caused by performance deterioration. Therefore, before loading data from a personal  
computer to the MR-8HD/CD, save all necessary folders to the personal computer and  
format the MR-8HD/CD hard disk.  
1)  
2)  
3)  
4)  
Format the MR-8HD/CD internal hard disk (see page 124).  
Disable the disk protection (see page 94).  
Connect the MR-8HD/CD to a personal computer via USB (see page 93).  
Copy the desired song folder on the personal computer to the root folder of the  
MR-8HD/CD hard disk.  
<Note>: Do not use "move" operation, as with saving data to a computer.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Data export to a personal computer)  
5)  
Repeat step 4) as many times as required.  
<Note>: Usually, the song order follows the copied order. However, it may be different  
depending on a computer OS.  
6)  
After making copy of all necessary folders, exit the USB mode.  
(3) Copy data to a CD-R/RW disc using the internal CD-R/RW drive.  
As with (1), each track data is converted to a single mono WAV file.  
The data is compressed to a small size and saved to a CD-R/RW disc. See the supplemen-  
tary manual "How to use the CD-R/RW drive" for details.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Song management)  
Song management  
This chapter explains the following five operation procedures for song  
management.  
1) Selecting the desired song.  
2) Editing a song name.  
3) Deleting an unnecessary song.  
4) Protecting a song.  
<Notes>  
While a menu screen is shown, you can go up the menu screen level or  
directly exit the menu mode by the following operations.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
Select “ Back” on a menu screen and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display returns to the previous (upper level) screen. Repeating this  
operation finally exits the menu mode.  
Press the [REWIND] key.  
The display returns to the previous (upper level) screen.  
Repeating this operation finally exits the menu mode.  
Press the [STOP] key.  
The menu mode exits and the display shows the home screen.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Song management)  
Selecting the desired song  
The following describes how to select the desired song from the disk when more than one song  
is created on the disk. You can also create a new song by the similar procedure. See "Basic  
operations" (page 31) for details about how to create a new song.  
When more songs are created, the song list  
screen has more than one page, and you can  
scroll the list by rotating the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
"- - - :(New Song)" at the bottom of the screen is  
used when you create a new song.  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back"  
returns to the previous screen).  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
desired song number/song name, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display returns to the song menu screen,  
where "Select Song " is highlighted.  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Song ",  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the song menu screen,  
where " Back" is highlighted.  
5)  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
The display shows the home screen of the  
selected song.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Select Song " and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The display now shows the song list screen.  
The screen example above shows that four  
songs are currently created on the hard disk.  
The song list is shown on a single page.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Song management)  
Editing a song name  
You can edit a current song name save the edited song name. Only the current song can be  
edited.  
1)  
2)  
Load the desired song of which you are going to  
edit the song name.  
5)  
Use the character entry keys to enter the desired  
character to the flashing point.  
You can move the cursor (flashing point) by  
rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob (or by  
pressing another character entry key).  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back"  
returns to the previous screen).  
<Character entry keys>  
Some keys on the MR-8HD/  
CD top panel act as charac-  
PLAY MODE  
ter entry keys in the menu  
mode. For example, the  
[PLAY MODE] key (shown on  
the left) can be used to enter  
S, T, U, s, t, u and 7. Each  
STU7  
press of a character entry key switches the char-  
acter to be entered from among those assigned  
to the key.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Song ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the song menu screen,  
where " Back" is highlighted.  
<[DELETE] key>  
Pressing the [UNDO/REDO -  
DELETE] key deletes the  
character at the flashing point.  
By pressing this key repeat-  
edly, you can delete all char-  
acters under the flashing  
point.  
UNDO/REDO  
DELETE  
<Note>: If you enter the same name as an  
existing song or do not enter a name in step  
5 and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob in step  
6 below, the display shows "Illegal Song  
Name!" and returns to the song name edit-  
ing screen.  
6)  
After entering the name, press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The cursor moves to "[ENTER]" at the bottom  
of the screen. To cancel the operation, use the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to highlight “[CANCEL]”  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Rename Song ", then press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The display now shows the screen for song  
name editing of the current song, on which the  
rightmost character of song name flashes.  
7)  
8)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob again.  
The edited name is stored and the display  
returns to the song menu screen, where  
Rename Song ” is highlighted.  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
The MR-8HD/CD exits the menu mode and the  
display shows the home screen where the  
edited song name is displayed.  
Flashing  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Song management)  
Deleting an unnecessary song  
You can delete a song created on the hard disk.  
<Notes>  
You cannot delete a song which is protected. To delete such a song, release the protection of the  
song first (see the next page).  
A deleted song file still remains as a “hidden file” on the hard disk. So deleting a song file does not  
increase the remaining (recordable) space of the hard disk.  
You can export a “hidden file” to your personal computer via USB connection and use it on the  
computer (see page 95).  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the menu  
selection screen, where " Back" is highlighted  
initially (selecting " Back" returns to the  
previous screen).  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select a song  
to be deleted, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows warning and confirmation  
for deleting the song.  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Song ",  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the song menu screen,  
where " Back" is highlighted.  
5)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob while holding down  
the [RECORD] key.  
The selected song is deleted, and the display  
returns to the song list screen.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Delete  
Song ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the list of songs created  
on the hard disk, from which you select a song to  
be deleted. In the screen example below, five  
songs are created so the list has only one page.  
(If more than five songs are created, the list has  
more than one page.)  
Any song number greater than the song number  
of the deleted song is moved up.  
In the screen example above, after Song 03 is  
deleted, ex-Song 04 is moved up to Song 03 and  
ex-Song 05 is moved up to Song 04.  
6)  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
In the example above, the display now shows  
the home screen of new Song 03 (ex-Song 04).  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Song management)  
If you delete all songs on the hard disk by  
repeating the procedure above, ":(New Song)"  
is shown. Then, create a new song (see page  
31).  
Protecting a song  
You can protect a song to prevent an accidental erasure. The protection can be released when-  
ever you want. To keep a recorded song safely, we recommend protecting it. You can make  
protection setting only for the current song.  
1)  
2)  
Load the song you want to protect.  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back"  
returns to the previous screen).  
Flashing  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "On",  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The current song is now protected.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Song ",  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the song menu screen,  
where " Back" is highlighted.  
The display returns to the previous screen.  
Flashing  
To release the protection, carry out the same pro-  
cedure above but select "Off" and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob in step 5.  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Protect=***", then press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The current option ("On" or "Off") flashes.  
The default option is "Off".  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Song management)  
<Note>: You cannot make recording or  
editing to a protected song. If you want to  
make recording or editing to a protected  
song, you must release the protection first.  
<Note>: When you set the protection to  
"On", all the recording-related keys, such  
as the [REC SELECT] and [BOUNCE] keys,  
are turned off.  
6)  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
<Tips>  
When the protected song is loaded, “ ” is shown  
in the upper left corner of the Home screen (in-  
dicated by the arrow in the screen example be-  
low).  
When this icon is shown, you cannot make re-  
cording or edit the song.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track editing)  
Track editing  
This chapter describes how to edit whole data of a selected (mono or  
stereo) track. Track editing does not consume the hard disk space. There-  
fore, the remaining space of the disk does not change by executing track  
editing.  
<Undo/redo of track editing>  
By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key after executing track editing, you can  
undo the editing. By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key after the undo opera-  
tion, you can return the track(s) to the condition after being edited.  
<Notes>  
Also note that, if you carry out any of the following  
UNDO/REDO  
after editing, you cannot undo the editing anymore.  
1. Making new recording  
2. Making new editing  
DELETE  
3.Turning off the power  
4. Loading another song  
<Notes>  
While a menu screen is shown, you can go up the menu screen level or  
directly exit the menu mode by the following operations.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
Select “ Back” on a menu screen and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display returns to the previous (upper level) screen. Repeating this  
operation finally exits the menu mode.  
Press the [REWIND] key.  
The display returns to the previous (upper level) screen.  
Repeating this operation finally exits the menu mode.  
Press the [STOP] key.  
The menu mode exits and the display shows the home screen.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track editing)  
Erasing track data  
You can erase whole data (from ABS ZERO to REC END) of the desired track(s) of the song cur-  
rently loaded.  
REC END  
ABS ZERO  
TRK 1  
TRK 2  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 5  
TRK 6  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
Silent  
<Note>: You cannot erase track data of a song pro-  
tected.  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Erase Track = *", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The currently selected option flashes and you  
can now select the desired option by rotating  
the [MENU/ENTER] knob. The available options  
are:  
1)  
2)  
Load the song you want to edit.  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back"  
returns to the previous screen).  
• 1 through 8 (mono track)  
• 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 (stereo tracks)  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Track Edit ", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
Flashing  
The display now shows the track edit menu  
screen, where " Back" is highlighted.  
6)  
7)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
desired option, and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
Erase Track = *” is now highlighted on the  
screen.  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
cursor to "[ENTER]" on the screen, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows "Please Wait", immediately  
followed by "Completed" when the MR-8HD/  
CD completes erasing.  
<Note>: If you want to cancel the erase op-  
eration, move the cursor to "[CANCEL]" on  
the screen, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"EraseTrack ", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The display now shows the screen for  
selecting the track(s) to be erased.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track editing)  
8)  
9)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now returns to the track edit menu  
screen, where “EraseTrack ” is highlighted.  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
<Note>: If you are not satisfied with the  
result, press the [UNDO/REDO] key to undo  
the operation (see page 103).  
Copying/pasting track data  
You can copy whole data (from ABS ZERO to REC END) of the desired track(s) of the song cur-  
rently loaded and paste it to the other desired track(s). The data on the source track(s) still  
remains after the copy/paste operation. Copy/paste operation can be done within the currently  
loaded song.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Track Edit ", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
ABS ZERO  
REC END  
TRK 1  
TRK 2  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 5  
TRK 6  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
The display now shows the track edit menu  
screen, where " Back" is highlighted.  
<Note>: You cannot copy/paste track data of a song  
protected. Release the protection before copying/  
pasting track data.  
1)  
2)  
Load the song you want to edit.  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back"  
returns to the previous screen).  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Copy-PasteTrack ", and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the screen for  
selecting the source track(s) and destination  
track(s) of copy/paste operation.  
"SourceTrack" selects the copy source track(s),  
while "Dest.Track" selects the paste destination  
track(s).  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track editing)  
7)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
destination track(s), and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
Dest.Track = *” is now highlighted on the screen.  
Flashing  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"SourceTrack = *", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
You can now select the desired copy source  
track(s) by rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The available options are:  
8)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
cursor to "ENTER" at the bottom of the screen,  
then press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows "Please Wait", immediately  
followed by "Completed" when the MR-8HD/  
CD completes the copy/paste operation.  
• 1 through 8 (mono track)  
• 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 (stereo tracks)  
<Note>: If you want to cancel the copy/paste  
operation, move the cursor to "[CANCEL]" on  
the screen, and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
Flashing  
6)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
source track(s) to be copied, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
You can now select the desired copy  
destination track(s)  
Flashing  
<Note>: If a destination track has recorded  
data, pasting the copied data overwrites the  
previous data.  
Flashing  
9)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now returns to the track edit menu  
screen, where “Copy-PasteTrk ” is highlighted.  
You can select the same number of tracks as  
the copy source track(s). For example, if you  
select a mono track for the source, you can  
only select a mono track for the destination.  
10)  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
<Note>: You cannot select the same track(s)  
for the copy source and destination.  
<Note>: If you are not satisfied with the re-  
sult, press the [UNDO/REDO] key to undo the  
operation (see page 103).  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track editing)  
Moving track data  
You can move whole data (from ABS ZERO to REC END) of the desired track(s) to the other  
desired track(s). After the data is moved, the original track(s) is(are) silent. You can only move  
track data within the current song.  
ABS ZERO  
REC END  
TRK 1  
TRK 2  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 5  
TRK 6  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
<Note>: You cannot move track data of a song pro-  
tected. Release the protection before moving track  
data.  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"SourceTrack = *", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
You can now select the desired move source  
track(s) by rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The available options are:  
1)  
2)  
Load the song you want to edit.  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back"  
returns to the previous screen).  
• 1 through 8 (mono track)  
• 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 (stereo tracks)  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Track Edit ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the track edit menu  
screen, where " Back" is highlighted.  
Flashing  
6)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select source  
track(s), and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
You can now select the desired destination  
track(s).  
Flashing  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Move Track ", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The display now shows the screen for selecting  
the source track(s) and destination track(s) of  
the move operation. "SourceTrack" selects the  
move source track(s), while "Dest.Track" selects  
the move destination track(s).  
Flashing  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track editing)  
You can select the same number of tracks as  
the move source track(s). For example, if you  
select a mono track for the move source, you  
can only select a mono for the move destina-  
tion.  
<Note>: You cannot select the same track(s)  
for the move source and destination.  
7)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
destination track(s), and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
Dest.Track = *” is now highlighted on the screen.  
Flashing  
<Note>: If a destination track has recorded  
data, moving data overwrites the previous  
data.  
9)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now returns to the track edit menu  
screen, where “Move Track ” is highlighted.  
8)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
cursor to "[ENTER]" on the screen, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
10)  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
The display shows "Please Wait", immediately  
followed by "Completed" when the MR-8HD/  
CD completes the move operation.  
<Note>: If you are not satisfied with the re-  
sult, press the [UNDO/REDO] key to undo the  
operation (see page 103).  
<Note>: If you want to cancel the move opera-  
tion, move the cursor to "[CANCEL]" on the  
screen, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
Exchanging whole track data  
You can exchange whole data (from ABS ZERO to REC END) between the desired track(s).  
ABS ZERO  
REC END  
1)  
2)  
Load the song you want to edit.  
TRK 1  
TRK 2  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 5  
TRK 6  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back"  
returns to the previous screen).  
<Note>: You cannot exchange track data of a song  
protected. Release the protection before exchang-  
ing track data.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Track Edit ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the track edit menu  
screen, where " Back" is highlighted.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track editing)  
Flashing  
Flashing  
You can select the same number of tracks as  
the exchange source track(s). For example, if  
you select a mono track for the exchange  
source, you can only select a mono track for  
the exchange destination.  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"ChangeTrack ", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The display now shows the screen for select-  
ing the source track(s) and destination track(s)  
of the exchange operation.  
<Note>: You cannot select the same track(s)  
"Source Track" selects the exchange source  
track(s), while "Dest.Track" selects the exchange  
destination track(s).  
for the exchange source and destination.  
7)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
destination track(s), and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
Dest.Track = *” is now highlighted on the screen.  
Flashing  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"SourceTrack = *", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
8)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
cursor to "[ENTER]" on the screen, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows "Please Wait", immediately  
followed by "Completed" when the MR-8HD/  
CD completes the exchange operation.  
You can now select the desired exchange source  
track(s) by rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The available options are:  
• 1 through 8 (mono track)  
• 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 (stereo tracks)  
<Note>: If you want to cancel the exchange op-  
eration, move the cursor to "[CANCEL]" on the  
screen, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
Flashing  
6)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
source track(s),and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
You can now select the desired destination  
track(s).  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Track editing)  
9)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now returns to the track edit menu  
screen, where “Change Track ” is highlighted.  
10)  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
<Note>: If you are not satisfied with the re-  
sult, press the [UNDO/REDO] key to undo the  
operation (see page 103).  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Part editing)  
Part editing  
This chapter describes how to edit a "part" (*) of recorded song. You can  
edit data of a track or tracks between the "LOCATE A" and "LOCATE B"  
points. Part editing does not consume the hard disk space. Therefore,  
the remaining space of the disk does not change by executing part edit-  
ing.  
<(*) About "part">  
A "part" is defined as audio data between the "LOCATE A" and "LOCATE B" points. You  
can edit a "part" as described later.  
Therefore, before carrying out part editing, the "LOCATE A" and "LOCATE B" points  
must be set. See page 49 for details about how to set these points.  
You can set these points after entering the part editing mode (see the next page for  
details).  
<Undo/redo of editing>  
You can undo part editing. By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key after executing part  
editing, the song returns to the original condition before editing.  
By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key after undoing part editing, you can again return  
the song to the condition after being edited.  
<Notes>  
UNDO/REDO  
Also note that if you carry out any of the following after  
editing, you cannot undo the editing anymore.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Making new recording  
Making new editing  
Turning off the power  
Loading another song  
DELETE  
[UNDO/REDO] key  
<Notes>  
While a menu screen is shown, you can go up the menu screen level or directly exit  
the menu mode by the following operations.  
(1)  
(2)  
(2)  
Select “ Back” on a menu screen and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display returns to the previous (upper level) screen. Repeating this  
operation finally exits the menu mode.  
Press the [REWIND] key.  
The display returns to the previous (upper level) screen.  
Repeating this operation finally exits the menu mode.  
Press the [STOP] key.  
The menu mode exits and the display shows the home screen.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Part editing)  
Playing back the "part" (between LOCATE A and LOCATE B) to be edited  
You can play back audio of the "part" before carrying out edit operation. After setting the  
LOCATE A and LOCATE B points, follow the procedure below for checking the part.  
You can check the part before entering the menu mode, as well as while the part editing  
screen is shown.  
1)  
Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the [STOP] key.  
The MR-8HD/CD starts playback between the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points (see also page  
44).  
2)  
During playback, raise the appropriate track fader(s) and the [MASTER] fader.  
You can monitor only the "part" to be edited, so you can check the editing range.  
You can change the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points during the edit operation, as well as  
before entering the editing mode (see the following for details).  
Changing an edit point during editing  
On the screen for selecting the target track(s)  
to be edited, you can see the current recorder  
position information (in ABS time or bar/  
beat/clock). The following screen example  
shows the screen for selecting the track(s)  
for part erasing.  
The LOCATE A or LOCATE B point can be  
changed while this screen is shown by fol-  
lowing the procedure below.  
1)  
2)  
Move the recorder to the desired point  
by using the [PLAY], [REWIND] or [F FWD]  
key.  
While the recorder is at the desired point,  
press the [STORE] key and followed by  
the [LOCATE A/IN] or [LOCATE B/OUT]  
key.  
The time (or bar/beat/clock) value changes  
in realtime as the recorder moves (i.e. when  
it plays, fastforwards, rewinds, locates, etc.).  
When you carry out the locate operation to  
the LOCATE A or LOCATE B point and the  
current position matches the locate point,  
"LocA=" (or "LocB=") is shown to the left of  
the current position information, as shown  
below.  
The old editing point is overwritten by  
the new point. After setting the new  
editing point, "LocA=" (or "LocB=") is  
shown to the left of the current position  
information, as shown left.  
After setting the new editing points, you can  
edit (erase, paste, move or exchange) data of  
newly specified part.  
This shows that the recorder is now at the  
LOCATE A (or LOCATE B) point.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Part editing)  
Erasing the part(s)  
You can erase the part(s) on the selected track(s) of the current song.  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Erase Part ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the screen for  
selecting a track or tracks of which you want  
to erase the part(s). On the screen, " Back"  
is initially highlighted.  
LOCATE B  
point  
LOCATE A  
point  
REC END  
ABS ZERO  
TRK 1  
TRK 2  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 5  
TRK 6  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
Silent  
<Note>: You cannot erase the part(s) of a song  
which is protected. Release the song protection  
before erasing the part(s).  
1)  
Load the song you want to edit.  
2)  
3)  
Set the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points (see  
page 49).  
You can check the part(s) by playing back the  
recorder between the LOCATE A and LOCATE  
B points (see page 44).  
6)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Erase  
Track = *", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The current option starts flashing and you can  
now select the desired track(s) by rotating the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob. The available options are:  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back" returns  
to the previous screen).  
• 1 through 8 (mono track)  
• 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 (stereo tracks)  
Flashing  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Part Edit ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the part edit menu  
screen, where " Back" is highlighted.  
7)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
desired option, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display returns to the previous screen.  
Flashing  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Part editing)  
8)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
cursor to "[ENTER]" on the screen, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows "Please Wait", immediately  
followed by "Completed" when the MR-8HD/  
CD completes erasing.  
If you want to cancel the part erase operation,  
move the cursor to "[CANCEL]" on the screen,  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
9)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now returns to the part edit menu  
screen, where “Erase Part ” is highlighted.  
10)  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
<Note>: If you are not satisfied with the re-  
sult, press the [UNDO/REDO] key to undo the  
operation (see page 111).  
Copying/pasting the part(s)-1  
You can copy the desired part(s) of the selected track(s) and paste it(them) to the same time  
position of the other desired track(s). The copy/paste operation of a part or parts can be made  
only within the current song. You can also make the copy/paste operation of a part or parts  
using another method described later in "Copying/pasting the desired part(s) (2)".  
LOCATE A  
point  
LOCATE B  
point  
3)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back" returns  
to the previous screen).  
TRK 1  
TRK 2  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 5  
TRK 6  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
<Note>: You cannot copy/paste track data of a song  
protected. Release the protection before making  
the copy/paste operation.  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Part Edit ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the part edit menu  
screen, where " Back" is highlighted.  
<Note>: If you want to paste the copied part(s) to  
the desired time position of other track(s) other  
than the position between the LOCATE A and LO-  
CATE B points, use the method described later in  
"Copying/pasting the desired part(s) (2)".  
1)  
2)  
Load the song you want to edit.  
Set the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points for  
specifying the desired part(s) (see page 49).  
You can check the part(s) by playing back  
between the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points  
(see page 44).  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Part editing)  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Copy-  
PastePart ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the screen for  
selecting the source track(s) and destination  
track(s) of copy/paste. " Back" is initially  
highlighted.  
<Note>: You cannot select the same track(s)  
for the copy source and destination.  
8)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
destination track(s), and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The display returns to the previous screen.  
Flashing  
6)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Source  
Track = *", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the screen for  
9)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
cursor to "[ENTER]" at the bottom of the screen,  
then press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows "Please Wait", immediately  
followed by "Completed" when the MR-8HD/  
CD completes the copy/paste operation.  
selecting the copy source track(s). You can  
select the copy source track(s) by rotating the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob. The available options are:  
• 1 through 8 (mono track)  
• 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 (stereo tracks)  
To cancel the copy/paste operation, move the  
cursor to "[CANCEL]" at the bottom of the  
screen, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
Flashing  
7)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the source  
track(s) to be copied, and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
You can select the destination track(s) by  
rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The available options are:  
• 1 through 8 (mono track)  
• 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 (stereo tracks)  
10)  
11)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now returns to the part edit menu  
screen, where “Copy-Paste Part ” is highlighted.  
Flashing  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
<Note>: If you are not satisfied with the re-  
sult, press the [UNDO/REDO] key to undo the  
operation (see page 111).  
Flashing  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Part editing)  
Copying/pasting the part(s)-2  
You can copy the desired part(s) of the selected track(s) and paste it(them) to the other time  
position of the desired track(s). Unlike the method described above in "Copying/pasting the de-  
sired part(s) (1)", the part data is copied to the (virtual) clipboard and then pasted to the specified  
position of the other specified track(s).  
The copy/paste operation of a part or parts can be made only within the current song.  
LOCATE B  
point  
LOCATE A  
point  
Copying to the clipboard  
ABS ZERO  
REC END  
TRK 1  
1)  
2)  
Load the song you want to edit.  
TRK 2  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 5  
TRK 6  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
Set the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points (see  
page 49).  
You can check the edited part(s) by playing  
back between the LOCATE A and LOCATE B  
points (see page 44).  
3)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back" returns  
to the previous screen).  
Clipboard  
(Virtual)  
LOCATE A  
point  
TRK 1  
TRK 2  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 5  
TRK 6  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Part Edit ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the part edit menu  
screen, where " Back" is highlighted.  
<Note>: If you paste the part(s) to the same time  
position of the other track(s), we recommend us-  
ing the method described above in "Copying/past-  
ing the desired part(s) (1)", because it works faster.  
<Note>: You cannot copy/paste track data of a song  
protected. Release the protection before making  
the copy/paste operation.  
<Note>: If you turn off the MR-8HD/CD after copy-  
ing the part data to the clipboard, the data on the  
clipboard is lost.  
Also note that you cannot undo copying data to  
the clipboard.  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Copy Part ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the screen for selecting  
the source track(s).  
"
Back" is initially highlighted.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Part editing)  
6)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"CopyTrack ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the screen for selecting  
the copy source track(s).  
You can select the copy source track(s) by  
rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The available options are:  
9)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
• 1 through 8 (mono track)  
• 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 (stereo tracks)  
The display now returns to the part edit menu  
screen, where “Copy Part ” is highlighted.  
The procedure example below shows how  
to paste the copied part data on the  
clipboard to the LOCATE A point of the  
selected track.  
Pasting clipboard data  
The following procedure is assumed that the  
LOCATE A point, the paste destination, is set  
Flashing  
1)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Paste Part >", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the screen for  
selecting the paste destination track(s).  
7)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the track(s)  
to be copied, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display returns to the previous screen.  
"
Back" is initially highlighted .  
Flashing  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Paste Track = *", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
8)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
cursor to "[ENTER]" at the bottom of the screen,  
then press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
You can now select the desired paste destination  
track(s) by rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The available options are:  
The display shows "Please Wait", immediately  
followed by "Completed" when the MR-8HD/  
CD completes the part copy operation.  
To cancel the part copy operation, move the  
cursor to "[CANCEL]" at the bottom of the  
screen, and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
• 1 through 8 (mono track)  
• 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 (stereo tracks)  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Part editing)  
<Note>: If you are going to carry out the  
paste operation when no data is pasted on  
the clipboard, the error message (“Clipboard  
Empty!) is shown on the display and the MR-  
8HD/CD does not accept the operation.  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode  
and copy the desired data to the clipboard  
before carrying out the paste operation.  
5)  
6)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now returns to the part edit menu  
screen, where “Paste Part ” is highlighted.  
Flashing  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
paste destination track(s), and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
The display returns to the previous screen.  
<Note>: If you are not satisfied with the re-  
sult, press the [UNDO/REDO] key to undo the  
operation (see page 111).  
Flashing  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
cursor to "[ENTER]" on the screen, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows "Please Wait", immediately  
followed by "Completed" when the MR-8HD/  
CD completes the paste operation.  
If you want to cancel the part paste operation,  
move the cursor to "[CANCEL]" on the screen,  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Part editing)  
Moving the part(s)  
You can move the desired part(s) of the desired track(s) to the other desired track(s).  
The part move operation can be made only within the current song. After the part move opera-  
tion is carried out, the source part(s) becomes silent.  
LOCATE A  
point  
LOCATE B  
point  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Move Part ", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
TRK 1  
TRK 2  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 5  
TRK 6  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
The display now shows the screen for  
selecting the source track(s) and destination  
track(s) of the move operation.  
Initially, " Back" is highlighted.  
<Note>: You cannot move data of a song protected.  
Release the protection before moving data.  
1)  
Load the song you want to edit.  
2)  
3)  
Set the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points (see  
page 49).  
You can check the part(s) by playing back  
between the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points  
(see page 44).  
6)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "Source  
Track = *", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
You can now select the move source track(s)  
by rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The available options are:  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back"  
returns to the previous screen).  
• 1 through 8 (mono track)  
• 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 (stereo tracks)  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Part Edit ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the part edit menu  
screen, where " Back" is highlighted.  
Flashing  
7)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
move source track(s), and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
You can now select the move destination  
track(s) by rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The available options are:  
• 1 through 8 (mono track)  
• 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 (stereo tracks)  
<Note>: You cannot select the same track(s)  
for the move source and destination.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Part editing)  
10)  
11)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now returns to the part edit menu  
screen, where “Move Part ” is highlighted.  
Flashing  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
<Note>: If you are not satisfied with the re-  
sult, press the [UNDO/REDO] key to undo the  
operation (see page 111).  
Flashing  
8)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
destination track(s), and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display returns to the screen where  
"Dest.Track = *" is highlighted.  
Flashing  
9)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
cursor to "[ENTER]" on the screen, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows "Please Wait", immediately  
followed by "Completed" when the MR-8HD/  
CD completes the move operation.  
If you want to cancel the move operation, move  
the cursor to "[CANCEL]" on the screen, and  
press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Part editing)  
Exchange the part(s)  
You can exchange the parts between the desired tracks. The part exchange operation can be  
made only within the current song.  
LOCATE B  
point  
LOCATE A  
point  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Change Part " in the second page, and press  
the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
ABS ZERO  
REC END  
TRK 1  
The display now shows the screen for  
selecting the source track(s) and destination  
track(s) of the exchange operation.  
Initially, " Back" is highlighted.  
TRK 2  
TRK 3  
TRK 4  
TRK 5  
TRK 6  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
<Note>: You cannot exchange data of a song pro-  
tected. Release the protection before exchanging  
parts.  
1)  
Load the song you want to edit.  
2)  
3)  
Set the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points (see  
page 49).  
You can check the parts by playing back  
between the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points  
(see page 44).  
6)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Source Track=*", and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
You can now select the exchange source track(s)  
by rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The available options are:  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back" returns  
to the previous screen).  
• 1 through 8 (mono track)  
• 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 (stereo tracks)  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Part Edit ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the part edit menu  
screen, where " Back" is highlighted.  
Flashing  
7)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
source track(s) to be exchanged, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
You can now select the exchange destination  
track(s) by rotating the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The available options are:  
• 1 through 8 (mono track)  
• 1/2, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 (stereo tracks)  
<Note>: You cannot select the same track(s)  
for the exchange source and destination.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Part editing)  
10)  
11)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now returns to the part edit menu  
screen, where “Change Part ” is highlighted.  
Flashing  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
<Note>: If you are not satisfied with the re-  
sult, press the [UNDO/REDO] key to undo the  
operation (see page 111).  
Flashing  
8)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
destination track(s), and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows the screen where  
"Dest.Track = **" is highlighted.  
Flashing  
9)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to move the  
cursor to "[ENTER]" on the screen, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display shows "Please Wait", immediately  
followed by "Completed" when the MR-8HD/  
CD completes the exchange operation.  
If you want to cancel the exchange operation,  
move the cursor to "[CANCEL]" on the screen,  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Other functions)  
Other functions  
This chapter describes the following functions which are important for  
using the MR-8HD/CD.  
(1) Hard disk formatting  
(2) Peak hold time setting  
(3) Pre-roll/post-roll time setting  
(4) Beat resolution mode on/off  
(5) Phantom power on/off  
(6) Initializing the MR-8HD/CD  
<Notes>  
While a menu screen is shown, you can go up the menu screen level or  
directly exit the menu mode by the following operations.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
Select “ Back” on a menu screen and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display returns to the previous (upper level) screen. Repeating this  
operation finally exits the menu mode.  
Press the [REWIND] key.  
The display returns to the previous (upper level) screen.  
Repeating this operation finally exits the menu mode.  
Press the [STOP] key.  
The menu mode exits and the display shows the home screen.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Other functions)  
Hard disk formatting  
You can reformat the MR-8HD/CD internal hard disk by using the FAT32 file system. By refor-  
matting the hard disk, all existing song data on the hard disk is erased, while all setting data  
including the menu settings are initialized, and a new song (Song01) is automatically created.  
<Note>: You cannot undo hard disk formatting. Therefore, before executing hard disk format-  
ting, make sure that all song data on the hard disk is not necessary.  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back" returns  
to the previous screen).  
Flashing  
4)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob while holding  
down the [RECORD] key.  
Formatting starts.  
When formatting completes, “Completed” is  
shown on the display and the MR-8HD/CD  
stops disk access.  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"System ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
system menu screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted.  
6)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The MR-8HD/CD exits the menu mode.  
The display changes to the home screen for  
Song01 (song name: Song01) which is  
automatically created after formatting.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Disk Format " on the second page and press  
the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display show the screen where "AreYou  
Sure?" flashes.  
As this screen indicates, formatting the hard  
disk deletes all songs on the disk and you  
cannot undo disk formatting.  
To stop formatting, press the [STOP] key to exit  
the menu mode.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Other functions)  
Peak hold time setting  
The level meters shown on the display have the peak hold function. When it is enabled, the  
meter peak value during recording is held for the specified time.  
The default meter peak hold time is three seconds. You can disable the peak hold function or  
change the peak hold time.  
Peak hold indication  
By default, it is held for three  
seconds.  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back" returns  
to the previous screen).  
Flashing  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"System ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
system menu screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted.  
You can select from "3s" (3 seconds, default),  
"1s", "2s", "4s", "5s" and "Off".  
When "Off" is selected, the peak hold function  
is disabled (the peak value is not held).  
4)  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
desired hold time, and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The peak hold setting is confirmed and the  
display returns to the previous screen.  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
The peak hold setting is effective to all songs.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"PeakHold Time=*.*s" on the second page and  
press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The currently selected peak hold time (by  
default, "3s") flashes.  
You can now make the desired peak hold  
setting.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Other functions)  
Pre-roll/post-roll time setting  
As described earlier on page 47, when both the auto punch in/out and loop modes are active,  
the pre-roll and post-roll are effective in the loop function.  
You can set the pre-roll and post-roll time value by the following procedure.  
When both the auto punch in/out and loop modes are  
active, the loop starts from "the LOCATE A point minus  
the pre-roll time" and ends by "the LOCATE B point  
plus the post-roll time". The pre-roll time is initially set  
to four seconds, while the post-roll time is set to one  
second.  
LOCATE A  
Point  
LOCATE B  
Point  
4 sec.  
1 sec.  
In other words, with the default pre-roll and post-roll  
time settings, when executing auto punch in/out, the  
MR-8HD/CD starts playback four seconds before the  
punch-in point, and ends playback one second after  
the punch-out point.  
LOOP END  
point  
LOOP START  
point  
You can select between "0.1s" and "10s" in 0.1  
second steps.  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back" returns  
to the previous screen).  
Flashing  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"System ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
system menu screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted.  
4)  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
pre-roll hold time, and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The pre-roll time setting is confirmed and the  
display returns to the previous screen. To set  
the post-roll time, follow the procedure below.  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Post RollTime" and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The currently selected post-roll time (by  
default, "1.0s") flashes. You can now set the  
desired post-roll time.  
You can select between "0.1s" and "10s" in 0.1  
second steps.  
6)  
7)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select the  
post-roll hold time, and press the [MENU/ENTER]  
knob.  
The post-roll time setting is confirmed and the  
display returns to the previous screen.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Pre Roll Time=*.*s" and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The currently selected pre-roll time (by default,  
"4.0s") flashes. You can now set the desired  
pre-roll time.  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Other functions)  
Beat resolution mode on/off  
While the time base is set to the bar/beat mode, if you set the "Beat resolution" item in the menu  
to "On", the LOCATE A and B points are set in beat resolution.  
When "Beat resolution" is set to "On", the clock digit in the bar/beat/clock value is automatically  
rounded down or up, so that the clock digit is always "000".  
Let's see an example when the time base is set to the bar/beat mode and the  
"Beat resolution" is set to "On". If you set the LOCATE A point to "Bar 1/1 /clock  
468" and the LOCATE B point to "Bar 12/ 4 /clock 485", the rounded values are  
stored as below.  
"Bar 1 / 1 / clock 468" -> "Bar 1 / 1 / clock 000"  
(The clock value "468" is rounded down.)  
"Bar 12 / 4 / clock 485" -> "Bar 13 / 1 / clock 000"  
(The clock value "485" is rounded up.)  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back" returns  
to the previous screen).  
Flashing  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"System ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
system menu screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted.  
4)  
5)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "On"  
or "Off", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The selection is confirmed and the display  
returns to the previous screen.  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
" Resolution=**" on the second page and press  
the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The current option (by default, "Off") flashes.  
You can now set the desired option.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Other functions)  
Phantom power on/off  
The MR-8HD/CD can supply phantom power (+48 V) to the XLR balanced connectors of [INPUT  
A] through [INPUT D].  
So you can connect condenser microphones which require phantom power.  
You can turn on or off phantom power to the XLR connectors via the menu mode.  
<Note>: The phantom power can be supplied to the XLR balanced connectors of [INPUT A]  
through [INPUT D]. Therefore, to connect a sound source which does not require the phan-  
tom power, use any of the unbalanced phone input jacks on [INPUT A] through [INPUT D].  
If any plug is inserted to the unbalanced phone input jack, the phantom power is not  
supplied to the balanced XLR connector on the same channel.  
The phantom power setting returns to "Off" (default) when you turn off the MR-8HD/CD  
power.  
<Notes on using phantom power>  
• Confirm that the connected microphone needs +48 V phantom power.  
• Turn on the phantom power after making microphone connection.  
• Mute the outputs of the MR-8HD/CD when turning on or off the phantom power or  
plugging/unplugging the microphone.  
<Tip>  
You can directly access to the input menu screen by a long press of the desired [TO  
STEREO BUSS ON/OFF] key. For example, a long press of the [TO STEREO BUSS ON/OFF]  
key of [INPUT A] directly accesses to the screen shown below.  
[TO STEREO BUSS ON/OFF] key of INPUT A  
ON/  
ON/  
ON/  
ON/  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Flashing  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Other functions)  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back" returns  
to the previous screen).  
Flashing  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Input " on the second page, and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the input menu screen.  
5)  
After making "Phantom Power" setting, press the  
[STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
The display returns to the home screen.  
When "Phantom Power" is set to "On", "  
"
lights on the home screen, as below.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Phantom Power=***", and press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The current option (by default, "Off") flashes.  
You can now set the desired option.  
Flashing  
4)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select "On",  
and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The screen shows a warning message for few  
seconds, and returns to the previous screen.  
While the message is shown, all input  
channels are muted. When the message is  
dismissed, the mute is released.  
If you select “Off” from “On”, a warning  
message appears and all channels are muted.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Other functions)  
Initializing the MR-8HD/CD  
By initializing the MR-8HD/CD, you can initialize all global menu settings common to all songs,  
as well as the time base and display contrast level.  
Default setting  
4 seconds  
Initialized item  
Pre-roll time setting  
Post-roll time setting  
1 second  
L-R (stereo) delay  
Off  
Delay type setting  
MIDI sync out setting  
MTC frame rate setting  
25 frames  
Beat resolution mode setting  
Peak hold time setting  
Off  
3 seconds  
Bar/Beat  
Time base (shown when turning on the power)  
Display contrast level  
Factory present level  
1)  
While the recorder is stopped, press the  
[MENU/ENTER] knob to enter the menu mode.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
menu selection screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted initially (selecting " Back" returns  
to the previous screen).  
Flashing  
2)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"System ", and press the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the first page of the  
system menu screen, where " Back" is  
highlighted.  
4)  
Press the [MENU/ENTER] knob while holding  
down the [RECORD] key.  
The settings are immediately initialized.  
The initialize is confirmed and the display  
returns to the previous screen.  
To cancel the initialization, press the [STOP]  
key.  
5)  
Press the [STOP] key to exit the menu mode.  
3)  
Rotate the [MENU/ENTER] knob to select  
"Init Memory " on the second page, and press  
the [MENU/ENTER] knob.  
The display now shows the confirmation screen  
for initializing.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Troubleshooting)  
Troubleshooting  
If you encounter any problem while operating the MR-8HD/CD, check  
the following for the possible cause of the problem before contacting our  
service station or dealer.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Troubleshooting)  
Troubles for recording  
<Trouble 1>  
<Trouble 5>  
I cannot record the sound source connected to  
[INPUT B] to track 1.  
The meter shows very low level and the recording level  
is too low.  
When recording a sound source to a mono  
track, you can only use the [INPUT A]  
section.  
Is the [TRIM] control for the input section  
the sound source is connected adjusted  
appropriately?  
Set the [TRIM] control just below the position where  
the [PEAK] indicator in the [INPUT A] section lights  
at the loudest part.  
Connect the source to [INPUT A].  
<Trouble 2>  
I cannot record the sound sources connected to  
[INPUT C] and [INPUT D] to tracks 1 and 2.  
<Trouble 6>  
The meter shows good level for recording, but no sig-  
nal can be monitored via headphones though the  
[PHONES VOL] control is raised.  
When recording two sound sources  
simultaneously, you must use [INPUT A] and  
[INPUT B].You cannot use [INPUT C] and  
[INPUT D].  
Reconnect the sources to [INPUT A] and  
[INPUT B].  
Are the track fader for the recording track  
and the [MASTER] fader raised?  
Both of these faders, as well as the [PHONES VOL]  
control, have to be raised in order to monitor the  
recording signal via headphones.  
<Trouble 3>  
We recommend to raise both the track fader for the  
The input level of the track to which I am going to record  
is too low.  
recording track and the [MASTER] fader to the “  
position.  
Is the recording track in the input monitor  
mode?  
Make sure that the [RECORD] key flashes and  
Is the [TRIM] control of the input to which  
the sound source is connected adjusted  
appropriately?  
"
" is shown on the display. If not, press  
To set the input level (= recording level)  
appropriately, use the [TRIM] control so that the peak  
indicator does not light continuously.  
the [RECORD] key to set the armed track to the  
input monitor mode.  
<Trouble 7>  
During overdubbing, I cannot monitor the playback sig-  
nal of the recorded track.  
<Trouble 4>  
I cannot hear the input signal via the headphones though  
the [REC SELECT] key is active.  
Is the track fader for the playback track  
raised?  
During overdubbing, raise the faders for both the  
playback and recording tracks appropriately.  
Otherwise, you cannot make overdubbing while  
listening to the recorded track(s).  
Did you press the [RECORD] key to make  
the armed track in the input monitor mode?  
Is the [PHONES VOL] control raised?  
You cannot hear the input signal unless the assigned  
track is in the input monitor mode by pressing the  
corresponding [REC SELECT] key to turn on the  
indicator. Also, you cannot hear any signal if the  
[PHONES VOL] control is set to minimum.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Troubleshooting)  
<Trouble 8>  
<Trouble 9>  
I cannot execute auto punch in/out.  
I cannot record audio data of a song onto an external  
digital recorder.  
Is "  
" shown on the screen?  
Is the connection between the  
[DIGITAL OUT] connector on the  
MR-8HD/CD and the optical input  
connector of the digital recorder made  
correctly?  
If it is not, press the [AUTO PUNCH] key to make  
the auto punch in/out function active.  
Are the punch-in and punch-out points set  
correctly?  
To check each point, press the [LOCATE A/IN] or  
[LOCATE B/OUT] key. The recorder locates to the  
punch-in or punch-out point, while the screen shows  
the appropriate time data.  
Check the connection, as well as the optical cable.  
Is the digital recorder set correctly for  
recording the signal fed to the digital input?  
See the manual of the digital recorder for details  
about the setting.  
If the punch-out point is earlier than the punch-in  
point, set these points appropriately so that the  
punch-in point is earlier than the punch-out point.  
Troubles for playback  
<Trouble 1>  
<Trouble 3>  
During playback, the recorder suddenly executes locat-  
ing.  
I press the [PLAY] key while holding down the [STOP]  
key, but I cannot execute loop playback.  
Is "  
display?  
" or "  
" shown on the  
Are the LOCATE A and LOCATE B points  
set correctly?  
If so, the play mode is set to the auto return or loop  
mode.  
Press the [PLAY MODE] key until "Off" is selected.  
By default, both of these points are set to the  
beginning of a song (i.e. "0m 00s 000ms" or "-2bar  
1beat 00clk"). In this condition, you cannot execute  
loop playback.  
Also, if the LOCATE B point is earlier than the  
LOCATE Apoint, you cannot execute loop playback.  
<Trouble 2>  
Cannot monitor the playback sound.  
Are the track fader(s) for the playback  
track(s) and the [MASTER] fader brought up  
to the appropriate positions?  
Raise the fader(s) for the track(s) you want to  
monitor, as well as the [MASTER] fader.  
If you monitor via headphones, also raise the  
[PHONES VOL] control.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Troubleshooting)  
Troubles for effect  
<Trouble 1>  
<Trouble 2>  
I cannot apply the effects.  
I cannot apply the mic simulation effects.  
Are the [EFFECT SEND] control for the track  
you want to apply the effect and track fader  
raised appropriately?  
Is the [INPUT A SELECT] switch on the rear  
panel is set to "MIC/LINE" position?  
INPUT A SEL  
GTR CLEAN  
GTR DIST  
MIC/LINE  
EFFECT SEND  
0
10  
0
10  
0
10  
0
10  
To apply the mic simulation effects to [INPUT A], the  
[INPUT A SELECT] switch on the rear panel must  
be set to "MIC/LINE" position.  
When you set the switch to any other position, you  
can use the amp simulation effects for insert effects.  
Raise the [EFFECT SEND] control(s) for the track(s)  
(1 through 4) you want to apply the effect to send  
signal(s) to the internal digital effects.  
Also, make sure that the fader(s) for the track(s)  
you want to apply the effect is(are) raised.  
Troubles for USB connection  
<Trouble 1>  
<Trouble 2>  
Cannot export a WAV file to a personal computer.  
The MR-8HD/CD drive icon is not shown on the per-  
sonal computer screen.  
Is the USB cable connected correctly?  
Check the connection, as well as the USB cable.  
It may take some times for showing a  
removable drive depending on a personal  
computer.  
It may take some times for reading the drive data.  
Wait for a while until the drive icon appears.  
Is the personal computer meets the  
requirement?  
The MR-8HD/CD can export a WAV file to a  
personal computer which runs on any of the  
following OS systems.  
On a Windows machine, the MR-8HD/CD is shown  
as "removable drive". On a Macintosh machine, it is  
shown as "MR-8HD/CD".  
Windows Me, 2000 or XP  
Macintosh 0S X or higher  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Troubleshooting)  
Other troubles  
<Trouble 2>  
<Trouble 1>  
I want to hear the rhythm guide click based on the "Sig-  
nature" and "Tempo" settings on the rhythm guide set-  
ting screen but the rhythm guide click based on the  
conductor map is output.  
I cannot hear the rhythm guide click.  
Is the [RHYTHM GUIDE] key is illuminated?  
When the [RHYTHM GUIDE] key is not illuminated,  
the rhythm guide function is not active and you  
cannot hear the rhythm guide click.  
Is the "Conductor Map" setting on the  
rhythm guide setting screen set to "On"?  
As shown on the screen below, if "Conductor Map"  
on the rhythm guide setting screen is set to "On",  
the rhythm guide click based on the conductor map  
is output. In this condition, the "Signature" and  
"Tempo" fields on this screen indicate "---" as  
below, showing that they are disabled.  
Is the "Int Click level" item in the "Rhythm  
Guide" menu set correctly?  
If the "Int Click level" item is set to "00" or a small  
value, you cannot hear the rhythm guide click.  
Set "Conductor Map" to "Off" (see page 77).  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Troubleshooting)  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Specifications)  
MR-8HD/CD Specifications  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Specifications)  
Specifications  
Audio recording type : Conformed to AES-31  
[Inputs/Outputs]  
0dBu=0.775Vrms, 0dBV=1.0Vrms, Reference level: -12dBfs  
The number of tracks : 8  
* the number of simultaneously recordable tracks: 4  
Analog input [INPUT A - INPUT D]  
Connectors  
: XLR-3-31 type (#2: hot balanced)  
: 1/4-inch, phone type  
: -48dBu (MIC) to +4dBu (LINE)  
: 1.5kor more  
ADC  
DAC  
: 24-bits, delta-sigma  
: 24-bits, delta-sigma  
Input level  
Input impedance  
Frequency response : 20Hz to 20kHz  
: 400kor more (When the INPUT  
A SEL switch is set to “GTR”.)  
: P48V (Phantom power ON/OFF is  
selected in the “Input” menu of the  
MENU mode.)  
Dynamic range  
: 90dB or more (TYPICAL)  
Phantom power  
Total harmonic distortion : 0.06% or less (TYPICAL)  
[General]  
Insert [INSERT (input A only)]  
Connector : 1/4-inch, TRS phone type  
(Tip: output, Ring: input)  
Norminal output level : -10dBV  
Weight (net)  
: Approx. 3.5 kg  
Dimensions  
: 312 (W) x 264 (D) x 110 (H ) mm  
Load impedance  
Norminal input level : -10dBV  
Input impedance  
: 10kor more  
Power supply  
: 120VAC 50/60Hz  
230VAC 50/60Hz  
240VAC 50/60Hz  
: 10kor more  
Stereo analog output [STEREO OUT (L, R)]  
Power consumption : 16 W  
Connectors  
Norminal output level : -10dBV (unbalanced)  
Load impedance : 10kor more  
: 1/4-inch, phone type  
Supplied Accessaries : Power cord, Owner’s Manual  
* Changes in specifications and features may be made  
without notice or obligation.  
Headphones output [PHONES 1, 2]  
Connectors  
: 1/4-inch, stereo phone type  
Max. output power : 30mW or more (at 32load)  
[Pin assignment of XLR connectors]  
Load impedance  
: 16or more  
MIDI output [MIDI OUT]  
Connector  
1
1
2
3
GND  
HOT  
COLD  
2
: DIN 5-pin  
: Conformed to the MIDI standard  
Format  
Digital output [DIGITAL OUT]  
3
Connector  
Format  
: Toslink optical type  
: IEC 60958 (S/P DIF)  
[Pin assignment of USB port]  
Footswitch [FOOT SW]  
Connector  
: 1/4-inch, phone type  
: TTL level  
1
VBUS  
D-  
D+  
Level  
2
3
1
4
2
3
4
USB (USB 2.0 HI-SPEED)  
Connector  
: B type (standard)  
GND  
USB HOST (USB 1.1)  
Connector  
: A type (standard)  
[Pin assignment of USB HOST port]  
1
2
3
4
VBUS  
D-  
D+  
[Record / playback]  
1
2
3
4
Recording medium : 3.5-inch hard disk drive  
Sampling frequencies: 44.1kHz  
GND  
Quantization  
File format  
: 16-bits, linear (non expanded)  
: FAT32  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Specifications)  
Physical dimensions  
INPUT A SEL  
GTR CLEAN  
MIC/LINE  
GTR DIST  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AC-IN  
USB  
USB HOST  
MIDI OUT  
FOOT SW  
312  
INPUT A SELECT  
INPUT A  
BAL  
INPUT B  
BAL  
INPUT C  
BAL  
INPUT D  
BAL  
STEREO OUT  
L
1
R
PHONES  
UNBAL  
/GUITAR  
INSERT  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
UNBAL  
TRIM  
2
PHONES VOL  
DISTORTION  
TRIM  
MAX  
MIN  
LINE  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
LINE  
PEAK  
MIC  
MIN  
MAX  
GUITAR  
PEAK  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
ON/  
OFF  
POWER  
TO STEREO BUSS  
TUBE  
RHYTHM  
TIME BASE  
SELECT  
EFFECT  
DYNAMIC  
CONDENSER  
MIC SIMULATION  
INPUT A  
CONTRAST  
GUIDE  
REVERB / DELAY TIME  
BRIT STACK  
US METAL  
60'S COMBO  
AMP SIMULATION  
1-4 > 5/6  
1-6 > 7/8  
NEW  
1-8 >  
STEREO  
7/8 >  
WAV FILE  
SONG  
MIN  
ROOM  
MAX  
HALL  
BOUNCE  
MENU / ENTER  
ABC1  
DEF2  
GHI3  
BRIGHT  
EFFECT SEND  
PAN  
NATURAL  
POWERFUL  
0
10  
R
0
L
10  
0
10  
R
0
10  
R
PLATE  
DELAY  
MASTERING  
B / OUT  
JKL4  
MNO5  
LOCATE  
L
L
L
R
UNDO/REDO  
AUTO PUNCH PLAY MODE  
A / IN  
STORE  
REC SELECT  
MASTER  
PQR6  
STU7  
VWX8  
YZ9  
+-_0  
DELETE  
F FWD  
1
2
3
4
5/6  
7/8  
MAX  
MAX  
STOP  
PLAY  
REWIND  
RECORD  
LOCATE REC END  
LOCATE ABS ZERO  
A-B PLAY  
MIN  
MIN  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Specifications)  
Block diagram  
When using the normal mode  
TO STEREO BUSS  
L
R
TO STEREO BUSS  
INPUT A  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
INPUT B  
INPUT C  
INPUT D  
INPUT A  
BAL  
EFF  
REC  
SELECT  
RECORDER  
IN1  
DISTORTION  
TRIM  
TRK 1 FADER  
TRK 1 PAN  
OUT1  
SIMULATION  
FX  
A/D  
TRK 1 EFF  
CLEAN  
TRK 2 FADER  
TRK 2 PAN  
TRK 2 EFF  
IN2  
OUT2  
INPUT B  
BAL  
A/D  
A/D  
A/D  
REVERB / DELAY  
TRK 3 FADER  
TRK 3 PAN  
TRK 3 EFF  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT3  
OUT4  
TRIM  
TRK 4 FADER  
TRK 4 PAN  
TRK 4 EFF  
REVERB / DELAY TIME  
INPUT C  
BAL  
TRIM  
TRK 5/6 FADER  
TRK 7/8 FADER  
IN5  
OUT5  
IN6  
IN7  
OUT6  
OUT7  
INPUT D  
BAL  
TRIM  
MASTER  
FADER  
ST OUT L  
ST OUT R  
IN8  
OUT8  
MASTERING FX  
When using the bounce mode (1-4 > 5/6 mode)  
TO STEREO BUSS  
L
R
TO STEREO BUSS  
INPUT A  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
INPUT B  
INPUT C  
INPUT D  
INPUT A  
BAL  
EFF  
REC  
RECORDER  
IN1  
DISTORTION  
CLEAN  
SELECT  
TRIM  
TRK 1 FADER  
TRK 1 PAN  
OUT1  
SIMULATION  
FX  
A/D  
TRK 1 EFF  
TRK 2 FADER  
TRK 2 PAN  
TRK 2 EFF  
IN2  
OUT2  
INPUT B  
BAL  
A/D  
REVERB / DELAY  
REVERB / DELAY TIME  
MASTERING FX  
TRK 3 FADER  
TRK 3 PAN  
TRK 3 EFF  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT3  
OUT4  
TRIM  
TRK 4 FADER  
TRK 4 PAN  
TRK 4 EFF  
INPUT C  
BAL  
A/D  
TRIM  
TRK 5/6 FADER  
IN5  
IN6  
OUT5  
OUT6  
MASTER  
FADER  
INPUT D  
BAL  
A/D  
TRIM  
TRK 7/8 FADER  
IN7  
IN8  
OUT7  
OUT8  
ST OUT L  
ST OUT R  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Specifications)  
When using the bounce mode (1-6 > 7/8 mode)  
TO STEREO BUSS  
L
R
TO STEREO BUSS  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
INPUT A  
INPUT B  
INPUT C  
INPUT D  
INPUT A  
BAL  
EFF  
REC  
RECORDER  
IN1  
DISTORTION  
CLEAN  
SELECT  
TRIM  
TRK 1 FADER  
TRK 1 PAN  
OUT1  
SIMULATION  
FX  
A/D  
TRK 1 EFF  
TRK 2 FADER  
TRK 2 PAN  
TRK 2 EFF  
IN2  
OUT2  
INPUT B  
BAL  
A/D  
REVERB / DELAY  
REVERB / DELAY TIME  
MASTERING FX  
TRK 3 FADER  
TRK 3 PAN  
TRK 3 EFF  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT3  
OUT4  
TRIM  
TRK 4 FADER  
TRK 4 PAN  
TRK 4 EFF  
INPUT C  
BAL  
A/D  
TRIM  
TRK 5/6 FADER  
IN5  
IN6  
OUT5  
OUT6  
MASTER  
FADER  
INPUT D  
BAL  
A/D  
TRIM  
TRK 7/8 FADER  
IN7  
IN8  
OUT7  
OUT8  
ST OUT L  
ST OUT R  
When using the bounce mode (1-8 > New Song mode)  
TO STEREO BUSS  
L
R
TO STEREO BUSS  
INPUT A  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
PAN  
INPUT B  
INPUT C  
INPUT D  
INPUT A  
BAL  
EFF  
REC  
RECORDER  
IN1  
DISTORTION  
CLEAN  
SELECT  
TRIM  
TRK 1 FADER  
TRK 1 PAN  
OUT1  
SIMULATION  
FX  
A/D  
TRK 1 EFF  
TRK 2 FADER  
TRK 2 PAN  
TRK 2 EFF  
IN2  
OUT2  
INPUT B  
BAL  
A/D  
REVERB / DELAY  
TRK 3 FADER  
TRK 3 PAN  
TRK 3 EFF  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT3  
OUT4  
TRIM  
TRK 4 FADER  
TRK 4 PAN  
TRK 4 EFF  
REVERB / DELAY TIME  
INPUT C  
BAL  
A/D  
TRIM  
TRK 5/6 FADER  
TRK 7/8 FADER  
IN5  
OUT5  
NEW SONG  
TRK 7  
TRK 8  
IN6  
IN7  
OUT6  
OUT7  
INPUT D  
BAL  
A/D  
TRIM  
MASTER  
FADER  
ST OUT L  
ST OUT R  
IN8  
OUT8  
MASTERING FX  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Specifications)  
MIDI implementation chart  
<Digital multitracker>  
Model MR-8HD/CD  
Date:  
Version: V1.00  
Remarks  
Transmitted  
Recognized  
Function............  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Default  
Basic  
Changed  
Channel  
Default  
Message  
Altered  
Mode  
*****************************  
X
Note  
Number:  
*****************************  
True Voice  
X
X
X
X
Note ON  
Note OFF  
Velocity  
Key's  
After  
Touch  
Channel's  
X
X
X
X
Pitch Bend  
Control  
Change  
X
X
X
Program  
Change:  
True #  
*****************************  
rem. 1  
X
System Exclusive  
X
X
X
X
: Quarter Frame  
: Song Position  
: Song Select  
: Tune  
Common  
X
X
X
X
: Clock  
System  
Real Time  
: Commands  
rem. 2  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
: Local ON/OFF  
: All Notes OFF  
: Active Sense  
: Reset  
Aux.  
Message  
Notes  
rem.1 : MTC  
rem. 2 : START, STOP, CONTINUE  
:Yes  
X : No  
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY  
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY  
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO  
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Specifications)  
Index  
<A>  
<L>  
Amp simulation ...............................................................58  
Loop ................................................................................45  
Locate .............................................................................48  
Auto return ......................................................................45  
Auto play .........................................................................45  
ABS time .........................................................................14  
Archiving a song .............................................................95  
Analog mixdown .............................................................41  
<M>  
Master recorder ....................................................41 to 42  
Mastering effect ..............................................................62  
Mic simulation .................................................................58  
MIDI .................................................................................85  
MIDI implementation chart ...........................................142  
Mixdown ................................................................41 to 42  
Move .....................................................................107, 119  
MENU mode ...................................................................25  
<B>  
Bounce ............................................................................63  
Bar/Beat .............................................................14, 25,127  
Beginning a song .....................................................14, 48  
Bar offset .........................................................................81  
<C>  
<O>  
Cueing .............................................................................44  
Clipboard .......................................................................116  
Click level ........................................................................76  
Clock ...............................................................................87  
Contrast ..........................................................................25  
Copy ...........................................................105, 114 to 118  
Copyrights .......................................................................11  
Conductor map ...............................................................78  
Changing track ..............................................................108  
Character entry key .................................................32, 99  
Creating a song ...............................................................31  
Overdubbing ...................................................................37  
Offset ...............................................................................81  
Optical cable ............................................................22, 42  
<P>  
Playback .........................................................36 to 42, 43  
Power supply ..................................................................28  
Power switch ...................................................................28  
Personal computer .........................................................89  
Part ................................................................................111  
Punch in/out ....................................................................51  
Punch in/out points .........................................................54  
Play mode .......................................................................45  
Pre roll .....................................................................47, 126  
Peak LED ........................................................................15  
Peak hold ......................................................................125  
Phantom power ............................................................128  
Protect ....................................................................101, 94  
Paste ...........................................................105, 114 to 118  
Post roll ...................................................................47, 126  
<D>  
Delay ...............................................................................60  
Distortion ...................................................................33, 35  
Display ............................................................................24  
Demo song ......................................................................29  
Digital mixdown ...............................................................42  
Delete song ...................................................................100  
Damage ...........................................................................11  
<E>  
Effector ............................................................................57  
Effect send ......................................................................61  
Erasing track .................................................................104  
Erase part ......................................................................113  
Event .....................................................................78 to 84  
Exchange the track .......................................................108  
Exchange the parts .......................................................121  
<Q>  
Quantization ..............................................................138  
<R>  
Recording ..............................................................35 to 42  
Recording level .....................................................35 to 42  
Recording track ...............................................................34  
Recording method ..........................................................12  
Reverb ............................................................................60  
Redo ...................................................36, 38, 40, 103, 113  
Remain ........................................................13, 35, 37, 39  
Rehearsal ....................................................55, 66, 68, 70  
Repro monitor .................................................................14  
Resolution .....................................................................127  
REC END .................................................................12, 48  
Rhythm guide ..................................................................75  
<F>  
Format ...........................................................................124  
Foot switch ......................................................................53  
<G>  
Gain .............................................................15, 36, 38, 40  
<H>  
Hard disk .................................................................12, 124  
Hidden file ...............................................................95, 100  
<I>  
<S>  
Internal CD-R/RW drive ..................................................23  
Insert effect ......................................................................58  
InputAselect switch ........................................................33  
Input monitor ...............................................14, 36, 38, 40  
Insert ...............................................................................59  
Input ................................................................................33  
Initialize .........................................................................130  
Signature ...............................................................75 to 80  
Simulation .......................................................................58  
Sequencer ......................................................................86  
Signature map ......................................................75 to 80  
Standby mode .................................................................28  
Song ................................................................................13  
Select a song ..................................................................98  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MR-8HD/CD Owner’s Manual (Specifications)  
Song name ...............................................................32, 99  
Synchronization ..............................................................85  
Song protect ..................................................................101  
S/P DIF ............................................................................42  
<U>  
Undo ...................................................36, 38, 40, 103, 113  
USB .........................................................................92, 138  
USB HOST .............................................................22, 138  
<T>  
<W>  
Track ...............................................................................34  
Trouble shooting ...........................................................131  
Trim .................................................................15, 35 to 40  
Track fader ...........................................................35 to 40  
Time base ................................................................14, 24  
Tempo map .....................................................................82  
WAV file ....................................................................13, 90  
WAV file conversion ........................................................90  
Warning ...........................................................................26  
<Y>  
Y cable .....................................................................18, 59  
Declaration of EC Directive  
This equipment is compatible with the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) - Directive on approximation of member nation's ordinance  
concerning the electromagnetic compatibility and with the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) - Directive on approximation of  
member nation's ordinance concerning electric equipment designed to be used within the specified voltage range.  
The Affect of Immunity on This Equipment  
The affect of the European Specification EN61000-6-1 (coexistence of electromagnetic waves - common immunity  
specification) on this equipment are as shown below.  
In the electrical fast transient/burst requirements, surge, conducted disturbances by radio-frequency fields, power frequency  
magnetic field, radiate electromagnetic field requirements and static electricity discharging environment, this could be  
affected by generation of noise in some cases.  
FOSTEX DISTRIBUTORS LIST IN EUROPE  
* Including non-EU countries (as of January, 2005)  
<AUSTRIA>  
<ITALY>  
NAME: Proel S. p. A.  
ADD: Zona Via Alla Ruenia, 37/43 64027 - Sant'Omero  
(Teramo), Italy  
NAME: ATEC Audio-u. Videogeraete VertriebsgesmbH.  
ADD: Im Winkel 5, A-2325 Velm, Austria  
TEL: (+43) 2234-74004, FAX: (+43) 2234-74074  
TEL: (+39) 0861-81241, FAX: (+39) 0861-887862  
<BELGIUM>  
NAME: General Audio  
<THE NETHERLANDS>  
ADD: Raymond Pelgrimslaan 101, B-1702 Groot-Bijgaarden,  
Belgium  
TEL: (+32) 2-4630650, FAX: (+32) 2-4661500  
NAME: IEMKE ROOS AUDIO B. V.  
ADD: Kuiperbergweg 20, 1101 AG Amsterdam, The  
Netherlands  
TEL: (+31) 20-697-2121, FAX: (+31) 20-697-4201  
<DENMARK>  
NAME: SC Sound ApS  
<NORWAY>  
ADD: Malervej 2, DK-2630 Taastrup, Denmark  
TEL: (+45) 4399-8877, FAX: (+45) 4399-8077  
NAME: Siv. Ing. Benum AS  
ADD: P.O. Box 145, Vinderen, 0319 Oslo, Norway  
TEL: (+47) 2213 9900, FAX: (+47) 2214 8529  
<FINLAND>  
NAME: Noretron Oy Audio  
<PORTUGAL>  
ADD: P. O. Box 22, FIN-02631 Espoo, Finland  
TEL: (+358) 9-5259330, FAX: (+358) 9-52593352  
NAME: Caius - Tecnologias Audio e Musica, Lda.  
ADD: Praca do Bom Sucesso, No 61 Bom Sucesso Trade  
Center, Escritorio 701/702, 4150-1460 Porto, Portugal  
TEL: (+351) 22-608-06-10, FAX: (+351) 22-608-06-29  
<FRANCE>  
NAME: Sennheiser France  
<SPAIN>  
NAME: Letusa S. A.  
ADD: 128 bis, avenue Jean-Jaures, 94851 Ivry-sur-Seine  
Cedex, France  
TEL: (+33) 1 4987 0300, FAX: (+33) 1 4987 0324  
ADD: C/Laguna 10, 28923 Alcorcon, Madrid, Spain  
TEL: (+34) 91-4862800, 91-4470898  
FAX: (+34) 91-6414597  
<GERMANY>  
NAME: Mega Audio GmbH  
<SWEDEN>  
NAME: Sennheiser AB  
ADD: Stromberger Str. 32, D-55411 Bingen, Germany  
TEL: (+49) 6721-94330, FAX: (+49) 6721-32046  
ADD: John Ericssonsgatan 10, P.O. Box 22035, SE-104 22  
Stockholm, Sweden  
TEL: (+46) 8 566 16400, FAX: (+46) 8 566 16490  
<GREECE>  
NAME: Bon Studio S. A.  
ADD: 6 Zaimi Street, Exarchia, 106.83 Athens, Greece  
TEL: (+30) 210-3809-605, 606, 607, 608  
FAX: (+30) 210-3845-755, 210-3827-868  
<SWITZERLAND>  
NAME: Audio Bauer Pro AG  
ADD: Bernerstrasse-Nord 182, CH-8064 Zurich, Switzerland  
TEL: (+41) 1-4323230, FAX: (+41) 1-4326558  
<ICELAND>  
NAME: I. D. elrf. electronic Ltd.  
ADD: ARMULA 38 108 REYKJAVIK, ICELAND  
TEL: (+354) 588 5010, FAX: (+354) 588 5011  
<UK>  
NAME: SCV London  
ADD: 40 Chigwell Lane, Oakwood Hill Industrial Estate,  
Loughton, Essex IG10 3NY U. K.  
TEL: (+44) 20-8418-0778, FAX: (+44) 20-8418-0624  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FORTHE US CUSTOMERS ONLY  
FOSTEX AMERICA LIMITED WARRANTY  
The following statement defines specific legal rights. You may also have additional rights de-  
pending on the state in which the Fostex product was purchased.  
WARRANTY PROTECTION  
All Fostex parts are warranted for one (1) year from the date of original purchase, except for  
recording media, such as hard disc drives and compact flash cards, heads, lamps and fuses,  
which are warranted, for one hundred-eighty (180) days. Fostex America will repair and / or  
replace parts during the term of this warranty. Labor costs are also covered by Fostex America  
for one (1) year from the date of original purchase. Except as specified below, this warranty  
covers all defects in material and workmanship in this product.  
The following are not covered by this warranty:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Batteries.  
Damage to any product that has been altered.  
Damage to any product on which the original serial number has been defaced, modified or  
removed.  
4.  
5.  
Damage to or deterioration of the external cabinet.  
Damage occurring during shipment of the product. (NOTE: Shipping claims must be  
presented to the carrier.)  
6.  
7.  
Damage resulting from accident, misuse, abuse or neglect.  
Damage resulting from failure to perform routine maintenance and / or calibration  
procedures.  
8.  
9.  
Damage resulting from failure to follow instruction in the owner's manual.  
Damage resulting from repair or attempted repair or by someone other than a Fostex  
America Service technician or a technician at an authorized Fostex America service station.  
10. Damage resulting from causes other than product defects, including lack of technical skill,  
competence or experience on the part of the user.  
11. External appearance items such as cosmetic parts, knobs, liquid crystal displays, buttons,  
etc.  
12. Replacements or repairs necessitated by loss or damages resulting from any cause beyond  
the control of Fostex America.  
13. Damage resulting from misuse or abuse on rental units.  
NOTE:  
FOSTEX AMERICA IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DATA LOST OR DAMAGED  
DURING OPERATION OFTHIS PRODUCT.  
CALIBRATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ARE NOT COVERED BY  
THIS WARRANTY.  
Fostex America reserves the right to inspect all products submitted pursuant to this warranty.  
If such an inspection shows reasonable cause to believe that any of the above exclusions to the  
above warranty are applicable, then Fostex America or the authorized service station will charge  
prevailing service rates and parts, costs for any repairs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOSTEX AMERICA LIMITED WARRANTY  
To claim all warranty service, first access www.fostex.com to receive service authorization (RMA  
number). Then present the authorization together with the bill of sale, which shows the date of  
original purchase to Fostex America. This warranty is not transferable.  
SHIPPING  
If this product needs service, you must take it, or package it carefully, using ample packaging  
materials to prevent damage during shipment and mail it to the distributor from whom you  
have purchased this product, postage pre-paid and insured.  
NOTE: Fostex America will not assume responsibility for damages or losses occurred in transit,  
but will reasonably assist the sender in processing any claims whenever possible (such as sub-  
mitting statements to the carriers when applicable).  
Any collect or C.O.D. shipments will be refused. In order to obtain warranty repairs, you must  
include the following:  
1.  
2.  
Date proof of original purchase (copy pf bill of sale or charge slip).  
A note describing the problem with sufficient particularity to allow Fostex America to  
inspect or adjust the problem.  
3.  
All accessory items appurtenant to that problem.  
LIMITATIONS OF INPLIED WARRANTIES  
AND EXCLUSIONS OF CERTAIN DAMAGES  
Unless considered unenforceable or unlawful under applicable law:  
A.  
All implied warranties ? including warranties of merchantability and fitness for a  
particular purpose ? are limited in duration to term of this warranty and to the express  
coverage of this warranty;  
B.  
Fostex America's liability for any defect product is expressly limited to repair or  
replacement of the product, at the sole discretion and / or option of Fostex America.  
Fostex America shall not under any circumstances be liable for:  
1.  
Damaged based on inconvenience, loss of use of the product, loss of time,  
interrupted operation or commercial loss, OR;  
2.  
Any damages, whether incidental, consequential or otherwise, except damages  
which may not be excluded by under applicable law.  
C.  
Fostex America makes no other warranties, express or implied, above and / or beyond the  
representations made herein.  
WARRANTY APPLIES ONLYTOTHOSE PRODUCTS SOLD AND  
DISTRIBUTED BY FOSTEX AMERICA  
Service Department  
FOSTEX AMERICA  
13701 Cimarron Avenue Gardena, CA 90249  
TEL: (310)-329-2960 FAX: (310)-329-1230  
www.fostex.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOSTEX CO.  
3-2-35, Musashino, Akishima-shi, Tokyo, Japan, 196-0021  
FOSTEX AMERICA  
13701 Cimarron Avenue Gardena, CA 90249 U.S.A.  
© PRINTED IN CHINA AUGUST 2006 8588 082 000  
447055  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Edelbrock Automobile Parts Big Block Chevy User Manual
Elation Professional Indoor Furnishings LUM013 User Manual
Eurotech Appliances Computer Accessories COM 1460 User Manual
EverFocus TV Cables EHA CRX User Manual
Fisher Price Musical Toy Instrument 79029 User Manual
Gateway Computer Monitor FPD2275W User Manual
GE Blender FGB M05 User Manual
GE Monogram Refrigerator Side by Side Built In Refrigerators User Manual
Generac Power Systems Automobile Parts SD150 User Manual
GE Oven SCA 2000 User Manual